TAA Tools
SUMMARY OF THE TAA PRODUCTIVITY TOOLS


Each tool is described in a short summary on this page. The tools are
listed in alphabetical order.

ABORT

    The Abort command is designed for use in a HLL program to end the
    program by sending the TAA9861 message as an escape. ABORT is both
    a command and a program name. An intended use of the program is
    when a CALL error has occurred and you want to recover from one or
    more specific error conditions, but not others. After handling the
    specific error conditions, just call ABORT.

ACCSECLIB

    Access Secure Library. Allows a method by which programmers can be
    kept from changing anything in a secure library, but are allowed
    to display, copy or use CRTDUPOBJ to their own library. The
    Security Officer must specify which libraries can be accessed.

ACTDLTRCD

    The Activate Deleted Record command writes an initialized record
    to a physical file relative record number. The record must be in a
    deleted status. This makes an active record in the file that can
    then be updated by other functions. The companion command is
    DLTACTRCD which deletes an active record.

ADDBIN4

    Add Binary 4 Values. This command is useful in CL programs when
    dealing with user spaces. It allows you to add two 4 byte
    character fields (which are really binary values) and produce a 4
    byte binary result. The tool exists only for compatibility
    purposes as CL now supports the %BIN function.

ADDDAT

    Add Date. Adds or subtracts a number of days from the system date
    or a named date and returns the new date. Useful for any
    scheduling function involving dates.

ADDDATMBR

    The Add Date Member command adds a new member to a multi-member
    file using the name MCYYMMDDnn where CYYMMDD is the current date
    and nn is a consecutive number beginning with 01. Up to 99
    versions may exist for a single day and a maximum of 32,767
    members in the file. A return value exists for the member name
    that was assigned.

ADDDAT2

    The Add Date 2 command allows a number of days to be add or
    subtracted from any date. Both the From date format and the To
    date format may be in any of the system supported date types. The
    command is useful for determining expiration dates or any other
    form of scheduling.

ADDDAT3

    The Add Date 3 command allows a number of days to be added or
    subtracted from a date and returns a new date. ADDDAT3 is similar
    to ADDDAT2, but has been optimized for new dates in the same year
    as the input date. The number of days parameter is limited to -365
    to +365. Any date format may be input and output.

ADDDFTRCD

    The Add Default Record command allows the insertion of default
    records at the beginning, the middle, or at the end of a physical
    file. If the inserts occur before the end of the file, the
    relative record numbers of the remaining records are shifted down
    to new relative record numbers. The inserted record fields will be
    filled with blanks or zeros.

ADDDSTLE2

    Add Distribution List Entry 2 assists with adding users to the
    same distribution lists to which another user belongs. If the user
    is already on one of the identified lists, no action is taken.

ADDDTAARA

    Add to a Data Area. Adds or subtracts a number to a data area.
    Useful for consecutively updating a data area such as 'next order
    number'. Can be used from one job or multiple jobs. Allows a
    return variable with the number before the update. The data area
    must be defined as *DEC LEN(9 0).

ADDGRPPRF

    The Add Group Profile command adds a Group Profile to one or more
    user profiles. The Group Profile is added either as the GRPPRF
    parameter or as a supplemental group (SUPGRPPRF parameter). A
    listing is output of the changes and any error conditions such as
    the profile is already specified as belonging to the group.

ADDHEX

    The Add Hexadecimal command adds or subtracts two hexadecimal or
    decimal values and returns either or both a hexadecimal or decimal
    value. Either unsigned or signed hex values may be entered. ADDHEX
    can be helpful when viewing dumps or user spaces.

ADDINZRCD

    The Add Initialized Record command adds one or more initialized
    records to an existing member of a physical file. Initialized
    records will have valid values in decimal fields, date fields,
    etc.

ADDJOBDLIB

    The Add Job Description library tool supports ADDJOBDLIB and
    RMVJOBDLIB to add or remove a single library from the INLLIBL
    parameter of one, all, or generic job descriptions in a library. A
    POSITION parameter similar to ADDLIBLE is supported. This
    simplifies mass changes to job descriptions or the simple step of
    adding or removing a library.

ADDJOBSCD2

    The Add Job Schedule 2 command adds one or more job schedule
    entries from the JOBSCDP file created by the CVTJOBSCDE TAA Tool
    to the system job scheduling function. A single job name may be
    added, a set of generic job names, or all names in a file. Using
    both CVTJOBSCDE and ADDJOBSCD2 allows system job schedule entries
    to be transported to another system.

ADDPDMOPT

    The ADD PDM Options command adds a record for certain TAA Tool
    commands to the PDM Options file. This allows a simple 2 character
    entry to cause a TAA Tool command for a member or object in the
    same manner as the PDM supported options.

ADDRDBDIR2

    The Add Relational Data Base (RDB) command is intended to assist
    in moving RDB entries as seen with DSPRDBDIRE to a different
    system. You must first capture the RDB entries to an outfile with
    DSPRDBDIRE and then move the outfile to the system to be applied
    to. Duplicate RDB names are rejected as well as a second version
    of *LOCAL for the Remote Location Name.

ADDRPYLE2

    The Add Reply List Entry 2 command uses the outfile created by
    CVTRPYLE on one system to allow individual entries to be added to
    another system. One entry at a time is added to the System Reply
    List. The command can make it easier to keep the System Reply
    Lists similar on multiple systems.

ADDSPCAUT

    The Add Special Authority command allows the addition of a special
    authority to one or more profiles. This is a simpler interface
    than CHGUSRPRF which requires an entry for any existing
    authorities as well as a new special authority. A RMVSPCAUT
    command is also provided to remove a special authority from one or
    more profiles.

ADDSRCMBR

    The Add Source Member command exists to allow for compatibility
    with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no longer needed
    because ADDPFM now supports the SRCTYPE parameter.

ADDSUPGRP

    The Add Supplemental Group command allows the adding of a
    supplemental group profile to one or more user profiles. The
    companion command is Remove Supplemental Group to remove a
    supplemental group profile from one or more user profiles.

ADDTIM

    Add to a Time Value. Adds or subtracts a number of seconds from
    the current time or a specified time. Returns the new time. Useful
    for scheduling functions involving time of day.

ADDUNQMBR

    The Add Unique Member command adds a unique member to an existing
    data base file. The naming convention UNQnnnnnnn is used where
    nnnnnnn is a number in the range of 1 to 9,999,999. The maximum
    members in a file at one time may only be 32,767. A return value
    exists for the member name that was assigned. The text description
    parameter should contain the purpose of the member.

ADJAPOST

    The Adjust Apostrophes command is designed to adjust the number of
    apostrophes in a variable so that the return result is valid for
    command processing. ADJAPOST is specifically designed for IFS
    processing, but may be used for variables intended for non-IFS
    use.

ADJTIM

    The Adjust Time command adjusts the time of day clock. The
    adjustment is specified either plus or minus in microseconds. The
    adjustment period occurs over a period of time such as it may take
    several minutes for a few seconds to be adjusted. The time for the
    adjustment to take place is also dependent on hardware speed. The
    QWCADJTM API is used.

ADJVAR

    Adjust variable. Provides a method of centering, left adjusting,
    or right adjusting data into a return variable. Useful for
    adjusting variable length headings before printing or displaying.
    For right adjusting a decimal value, see the RGTADJVAR tool.

ADPMBR

    Adopt member. Provides an alternative method of allowing end users
    to add, clear, or remove members during programs. Three commands
    are provided (ADDPFMADP, CLRPFMADP, and RMVMADP) which have the
    same parameters and options as the corresponding system commands.
    The Security Officer must define what files are valid to be used
    with the tool commands.

ALCDBF

    Allocate Data Base File. Allocates a data base file and all of
    it's members. This differs from the normal ALCOBJ command which
    will allocate only a single member. A DLCDBF command also exists.

ALCLIB

    The Allocate Library command allows objects in one or more
    libraries to be locked in a similar manner to the system SAV
    commands. The function is not a complete match with the SAV
    function locking approach, but may be used as a pre-test condition
    to a SAV function. A spooled file and an outfile are created. The
    companion command is Deallocate Library (DLCLIB) to unlock the
    objects found in the outfile.

ALCOBJ2

    Allocate Object 2. Performs the same allocation as the system
    ALCOBJ command, but provides better feedback. A completion message
    is sent if the command is successful. If the object cannot be
    allocated, diagnostic messages are sent describing the jobs that
    hold the conflicting locks followed by an escape message.

ALCTMPMBR

    Allocate Temporary Member. Allocates a member in files provided in
    TAATOOL and returns the member name. This is a performance
    advantage for those jobs which need to create temporary files
    (e.g. an outfile from a DSP command). The overhead of creating
    files and members is significant. ALCTMPMBR provides standard
    files which can be used and allocates members to individual jobs.

ANZCLPCMD

    The Analyze CLP Commands command analyzes the CLP commands in the
    CLPCMDP file created by the CVTCLPCMD TAA tool. A summary by
    command name is listed. Selection can occur by such things as a
    source file name and library.

ANZFLD

    The Analyze Field command sequences an externally described file
    on a named field and allows analysis by percentiles, ranges, or
    unique values. For each summary line printed, decimal fields may
    be summed, averaged, the maximum and minimum values determined,
    and the standard deviation calculated. Selection criteria may be
    specified to limit what is processed.

ANZOUTQ

    The Analyze Output Queue command provides summary information for
    various attributes of spooled files in an output queue such as by
    form type, by user, by schedule, by open date, etc. For each
    category, a count is also supplied. ANZOUTQ provides a good
    summary of what exists.

ANZRPGSRC

    The Analyze RPG Source command outputs a listing for a specific
    RPG or RPGLE source member. Some information is standard and is
    always output such as the number of comments and counts by spec
    type. Other information is optional such as where subroutines
    begin/end and an operation code summary. Both RPG III and RPG IV
    (fixed form) member types are supported.

ANZTAAUSE

    The Analyze TAA Usage command analyzes information concerning TAA
    usage. The intent of the command is to provide feedback to Jim
    Sloan, Inc. regarding customer usage of TAA functions.

APPVAL

    Application Value. The Application Value tool is designed to allow
    options to be specified for a standard application. Commands are
    provided for both the 'application designer' and the 'application
    installer'. Useful for writing applications which need to have
    options that vary per installation.

APYRMTJRN

    The Apply Remote Journal tool provides 'real time' data
    replication to a remote system using the system remote journaling
    support. Only data from data base members, data areas, and data
    queues are supported. The function may be used for a variety of
    application needs. If used for high availability, you have the
    responsibility of keeping the environment in synch (such as
    changes to programs, object attributes, etc).

APYUSRCHG

    Apply User Change. APYUSRCHG takes the output file produced by
    DSPJRN and applies it to one or all user files. Useful for
    applying the journal to a duplicate file where the i5/OS APYJRNCHG
    command cannot be used or when the journal must be transmitted and
    is too large.

ATNPGM

    Attention Program. Simple attention key program which provides two
    group jobs. Simple flip/flop. Works with user profile ATNPGM
    parameter. Useful for any work requiring a second group job.

AUDITING

    This is a documentation member only to help understand the basics
    of auditing on the system and some of the helpful TAA Tools. This
    provides an overview and some simple examples of how to get
    started with auditing.

AUDLOG

    The Audit Log tool is a series of commands that let you work with
    the audit log entries from the QAUDJRN journal. You may either
    display the entries using several different access paths or print
    the entries using different selection and sequencing criteria.
    Audit logs from multiple systems may be stored in the same data
    base.

BINSEARCH

    Binary Search. An RPG technique to use a binary search instead of
    a normal lookup operation. On large arrays (e.g. 100+ entries),
    this can be a significant performance advantage.

BKP

    Breakpoint Tool. Provides multiple commands for working with debug
    including BKP, TRACE, STEP, DBGVAR, and CHGDBGVAR. Simplifies
    using the debug facility by providing front end commands. Uses a
    data area in QTEMP and a prompt override program. Useful for
    debugging of programs.

BLDCALL

    Build Call. Allows a simple approach for submitting a CALL command
    to batch with a parameter list. The CMD parameter on SBMJOB
    eliminates much of the need for this function, but it is still
    useful in some cases.

BLDCHKAMT

    The Build Check Amount tool is designed to print words for the
    amount on a check such as 'Four hundred dollars and 03 cents'. A
    program is supplied to convert a decimal value to a string of
    text. An externally described data structure is used to pass the
    amount, return the string of text, and provide for various
    options. A demonstration of the function and options exists.

BLDDBFOVR

    The Build Data Base File Override tool is a program that can be
    called to provide an OVRDBF command ready to execute using
    QCMDEXC. The values and return command are passed in an externally
    described data structure. This simplifies what a program has to do
    for the typical application that processes a member list.

BLDPRTLIN

    Build Print Line. Used to build a formatted print line for the TAA
    tool PRINT. Avoids having to concatenate in blanks to provide for
    proper spacing while using the PRINT command. Allows editing of
    numeric values.

BLDQLF

    The Build Qualified Name command exists to allow for compatibility
    with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no longer needed
    because RPG now supports a concatenation function.

BLDRPGMSG

    The Build RPG message tool builds messages from array records in
    your RPG program. The message text can be used on displays,
    spooled output, or sent as message text. The tool describes how to
    use the standard code in your program to assist you in sending
    messages from an RPG program. The standard code is provided in
    TAARPGJR in QATTRPG.

BLKSYSMSG

    The Blank System Message command allows you to blank out an
    existing message in a message file and rename the message ID. This
    is intended for bothersome messages such as EDT0630 ('Have you
    tried the modern alternative to SEU?'). The message will continue
    to be sent, but only blanks will appear on the display. When
    BLKSYSMSG is used, a confirming display appears with the text of
    the message to be blanked out.

BOMBRUN

    The Bombing Run command provides an interactive game where you
    attempt to bomb a target. A plane moves across the display after
    you press Enter. F6 is used to drop the bomb. You must account for
    the direction and maximum speed of the wind. The target is also
    moving.

BRKMSGQN

    Break message queue N times. This allows N users to be notified
    when a message arrives at a specific message queue. Any user can
    respond to inquiry messages. Only a single user (the user who has
    the queue in break mode) can delete messages.

BUSCAL

    The Business Calendar tool provides a solution for the question
    'How many working days exist between 2 dates?'. A 'business
    calendar' object (a *USRSPC) must be created. The definition of
    'working days' is made by use of the WRKBUSCAL command which
    allows days to be 'excluded' such as 'Saturday', 'Christmas', or
    specific dates. WRKBUSCAL then builds a list of the 'excluded' and
    'included' dates.

CALC

    The Calculator tool is a series of commands that allow you to use
    the system as a simple add/sub calculator and provides an optional
    listing. The CLCFILP file must be created first. Many members may
    exist in the file thus allowing both temporary and permanent lists
    to be created and changed. Each amount entered may have an
    optional text description. The last date changed exists for each
    record.

CAPJOBA

    Capture and Return Job Attributes. The two commands are intended
    to allow a user program to protect its job environment when a sub
    program is called that wants to establish its own environment
    (e.g. the library list). The CAPJOBA command allows all of the
    current job attributes to be stored in a data area in QTEMP. The
    subprogram is then called. On return, the RTNJOBA command is used
    to reset the job environment.

CAPNETA

    Capture network attributes. The CAPNETA command provides a method
    of capturing the network attributes and storing them in the
    NETWRKATTR data area in TAASECURE. The companion command RTNNETA
    returns the attributes found in NETWRKATTR (CHGNETA is used).
    Useful for hot site recovery situations or when the network
    attributes should be shipped to another system.

CAPPTFINF

    The Capture PTF Information tool allows you to periodically
    capture PTF information using the outfile from the system DSPPTF
    command. Each captured version becomes a separate member in the
    PTFINFP data base file. The CMPPTFINF command may then be used to
    compare the changes between different versions.

CAPSECINF

    The Capture Security Information tool allows you to capture the
    current information for user profiles, system values, network
    attributes, and registration information. This allows a comparison
    to be made at a later time against the same information captured
    on a different date.

CAPSYSINF

    The Capture System Information tool provides a method of capturing
    all object, member, and IFS object information on a system. Each
    type of information is optional. Each time CAPSYSINF is run, new
    versions are added to files in a named library (the default name
    is TAASYSINF). These files can then be used by other TAA Tools
    such as CPYSYSINF or CMPSYSINF or queried by user functions.

CHGALLSPLF

    The Change All Spooled Files command allows all spooled files in
    an output queue to be changed for such values as OUTQ, FORMTYPE,
    SAVE, and ALIGN. This provides a command interface instead of
    using the '2' option on WRKOUTQ. A Hold/Release option also
    exists.

CHGASPA2

    The Change ASP (Auxiliary Storage Pool) Attributes 2 command
    allows a user with the special authorities *SERVICE and *ALLOBJ to
    change an ASP threshold value and the Compression Recovery Policy.

CHGAUT2

    The Change Authority 2 command is a simple front end to the system
    CHGAUT command that operates only on objects in a library.
    Multiple users may be specified, but not all CHGAUT functions are
    supported. Unlike GRT/RVKOBJAUT, there are no low level messages
    that clutter the job log and cannot be removed.

CHGBIGPARM

    Change Big Parameter. Allows a job to pass a large parameter to a
    batch job. Up to 2000 bytes can be passed on each command.
    Multiple commands can be used. The parameters are placed in a file
    with a key field. The RTVBIGPARM command is used in batch to
    retrieve the information.

CHGBIT

    The Change Bit command allows one or more bits to be changed in a
    byte to either *ON ('1') or *OFF ('0'). The bits are numbered 1 -
    8 with 1 being the high order bit. A variable must be specified
    for the &RTNBYTE parameter and all BITn parameters cannot be
    specified as *SAME.

CHGCLS2

    The Change Class 2 command allows a change to one or more *CLS
    object types. CHGCLS2 simplifies making mass changes to *CLS
    objects. For a more complete understanding of the parameters, see
    the CHGCLS command help text. A *CLS object owned by one of the
    system profiles may not be changed.

CHGCMDLIB

    The Change Command Library command allows you to change the name
    of the alternate library used for TAA commands (and a few other
    TAA objects). Depending on the existing command library, you may
    be asked to run DLTTAACMD and/or DUPTAACMD.

CHGCNLKEY

    The Change Cancel Key command works in conjunction with the
    RTVCNLKEY tool command. CHGCNLKEY allows the setting of the Cancel
    and Exit key information which may be of value when mixing system
    and user functions. The QWCCCJOB API is used.

CHGCPYRGT

    The Change Copyright command changes the language specific
    Copyright statement in one or all source file members in a
    library. Only specific source types are supported and considered
    for changes. If a language specific Copyright statement exists, it
    is dropped and the new Copyright statement inserted.

CHGDBFDAT

    The Change Data Base File Date command changes date fields in a
    file from an MMDDYY, DDMMYY, or YYMMDD format to a different
    format. This allows rearranging date fields to allow for normal
    processing based on your typical date format.

CHGDBFINC

    The Change Data Base Increments command changes the number of size
    increments for one or more data base files in a library based on
    the current percentage of records and a specified new percentage.
    Only data physical files are processed. The command defaults to
    'check' meaning no changes occur unless ACTION(*CHANGE) is
    specified.

CHGDDMF2

    The Change DDM File 2 command allows a change to one, generic, or
    all DDM files in a library. This simplifies making changes when
    the type of communication has changed (such as SNA to TCP) or
    other mass changes.

CHGDIRAUT

    The Change Directory Authorization command changes the
    authorization to a directory and its objects and all
    subdirectories and their objects. The command is a front end to
    the system command CHGAUT and uses the same parameters. CHGDIRAUT
    simplifies making mass changes to IFS authorizations. You may need
    to change the test case for your home directory.

CHGDSPF2

    The Change Display File 2 command allows a change to one or more
    display files. Not all of the CHGDSPF parameters are supported.
    CHGDSPF2 simplifies making mass changes to display files. For a
    more complete understanding of the parameters, see the CHGDSPF
    command help text. A display file owned by one of the system
    profiles may not be changed.

CHGDSPOBJO

    The Change DSPOBJD Outfile Dates command changes all date formats
    in the outfile created by DSPOBJD that are in an MMDDYY format to
    either DDMMYY or YYMMDD. The DSPOBJD outfile has several date
    fields that use the MMDDYY format regardless of the job date
    format. CHGDSPOBJO makes it easier to work with the dates if you
    want a format other than MMDDYY.

CHGDSTLE

    The Change Distribution List Entry command lets you change or
    remove an entry from one, generic, or all distribution lists. The
    From User ID value must match an existing entry. An ACTION
    parameter exists which defaults to *TEST to allow testing of what
    the *CHANGE function will provide.

CHGDSTPWD2

    The Change DST Password 2 command resets the DST password to the
    default value. The purpose of the command is allow a user who is
    not QSECOFR to reset the DST password. CHGDSTPWD2 may only be used
    interactively by a user who is authorized to the TAADSTPWD2
    authorization list.

CHGDTAQD

    The Change Data Queue Description command changes one or more
    attributes for a data queue. Only standard data queues are
    supported (not DDM data queues). The API QMHQCDQ is used. Not all
    attributes are supported by the API.

CHGDTAQD2

    The Change Data Queue Description 2 command allows a change to one
    or more *DTAQ object types. Not all of the CHGDTAQD parameters are
    supported. CHGDTAQD2 simplifies making mass changes to *DTAQ
    objects. For a more complete understanding of the parameters, see
    the CHGDTAQD command help text. A *DTAQ object owned by one of the
    system profiles may not be changed.

CHGFUNCNAM

    The Change Function Name command allows you to change the
    description of the Function field on WRKACTJOB to provide a better
    indication of what a job is doing. The command must be used in a
    CL program and not from a command entry line. The value on
    WRKACTJOB would appear as USR-xxxx where xxxx is the 10 bytes
    specified on CHGFUNCNAM.

CHGGENOWN

    The Change Generic Objects Owner command changes the ownership of
    objects with the same generic name. All object types or a list of
    specific object types may be named. The command simplifies
    changing ownership of multiple objects. For a single object, the
    system command CHGOBJOWN should be used. For all library objects,
    the TAA Tool CHGLIBOWN should be used.

CHGGRPPRF

    Change Group Profile. Allows a dynamic change of a group profile.
    The command must be run within the job that is attempting to make
    the change to another group profile. This is a form of multiple
    group profiles, but provides support for only a single group
    profile at a time. There are security considerations in making the
    change. Useful for dynamically changing the security environment.

CHGGRPPRF2

    The Change Group Profile 2 command allows you to change all
    members of a group profile for the parameters OWNER, GRPAUT, or
    GRPAUTTYP. This provides a simple method of ensuring all members
    of the group have the same attributes related to group profile
    processing.

CHGIFSOWN

    The Change IFS Owner command allows a change of ownership of IFS
    objects. The list of IFS objects to operate on is created as part
    of the command. The objects for a specific owner or the ownership
    of all objects found may be changed. An option exists to check
    what changes would occur.

CHGIFSOWN2

    The Change IFS Owner 2 command changes all IFS objects owned by
    one user profile to another. This allows a simple means of
    switching owners. An option exists to revoke the current owners
    authority. You must have *ALLOBJ special authority to use
    CHGIFSOWN2.

CHGINLMNU

    The Change Initial Menu command checks or changes the initial menu
    in one, generic, all user profiles, or in the profiles belonging
    to a group profile. System profiles are never changed. An existing
    initial menu may be named to ensure that only specific changes are
    made. The current initial menu value may be a specific initial
    menu, *ANY, or *SIGNOFF.

CHGINLPGM

    The Change Initial Program command checks or changes the initial
    program in one, generic, all user profiles, or in the profiles
    belonging to a group profile. System profiles are never changed.
    An existing initial program may be named to ensure that only
    specific changes are made. The current initial program value may
    be a specific initial program, *ANY, or *NONE. If the same library
    exists twice on the list, only the first occurrence is returned.

CHGJOBD2

    The Change Job Description 2 command allows a change to one or
    more *JOBD object types. Not all of the CHGJOBD parameters are
    supported. CHGJOBD2 simplifies making mass changes to *JOBD
    objects. For a more complete understanding of the parameters, see
    the CHGJOBD command help text. A *JOBD object owned by one of the
    system profiles may not be changed.

CHGJOBQJOB

    The Change Job Queue Jobs command allows changes to one, generic,
    or all jobs in a job queue. The jobs may be held, released, or
    ended. In addition, some parameters from CHGJOB are also valid
    such as JOBQ, RUNPTY, OUTPTY, OUTQ, etc.

CHGJOBQ2

    The Change Job Queue 2 command allows a change of one or
    more *JOBQ object types. CHGJOBQ2 simplifies making mass changes
    to *JOBQ objects. For a more complete understanding of the
    parameters, see the CHGJOBQ command help text. A *JOBQ object
    owned by one of the system profiles may not be changed.

CHGJOBSPLF

    The Change Job's Spooled Files command changes all the spooled
    files for a job for specified attributes such as changing to a
    different form type. This simplifies cleanup at the end of a job
    for spooled files created during the job.

CHGLBLJOBD

    The Change Library List from Job Description command changes the
    user portion of the library list to the value in a named Job
    Description. A value of *SYSVAL is supported in the JOBD and
    causes the library list to be changed to the value of the QUSRLIBL
    system value. CHGLBLJOBD can be used to simplify changing the
    library list in some environments.

CHGLF2

    The Change Logical File 2 command allows a change of one or more
    logical files. Not all parameters from CHGLF are supported. CHGLF2
    simplifies making mass changes to logical files. For a more
    complete understanding of the parameters, see the help text for
    CHGLF. A logical file owned by one of the system profiles may not
    be changed.

CHGLIBOBJA

    The Change Library Object Authorities command changes the owner,
    authorization list, and individual authorities of one or more
    objects in a library based on the output of the CVTLIBOBJA
    command. This may be used to help keep the authorization
    information the same between libraries on different systems.

CHGLIBOWN

    Change Library Owner. Changes the owner of a library and the
    objects within the library. Only the objects owned by the
    specified owner are changed. The old owner can remain authorized
    or be removed. Useful for cleaning up libraries or when
    distributing libraries to other systems.

CHGMAXMBR

    The Change Maximum Members command changes the number of maximum
    members for one or more data base files in a library based on a
    specified percentage. Only data physical files are processed. The
    command defaults to 'check' meaning no changes occur unless
    ACTION(*CHANGE) is specified.

CHGMSGD2

    Change Message Description 2. If you have second level text that
    exceeds 512 bytes, the CHGMSGD2 command provides a simple solution
    for maintenance. The first display shows the current values for
    all other parameters using the command prompter. Then a special
    display is shown with 1500 bytes of second level text. A third
    display is optionally available for an additional 1500 bytes of
    text.

CHGMSGQ2

    The Change Message Queue 2 command allows a change to one or
    more *MSGQ object types. Not all of the CHGMSGQ parameters are
    supported. CHGMSGQ2 simplifies making mass changes to *MSGQ
    objects. For a more complete understanding of the parameters, see
    the CHGMSGQ command help text. A *MSGQ object owned by one of the
    system profiles may not be changed.

CHGOBJ

    The Change Object command provides either CHGxxx or WRKxxx
    commands for most object types that can be changed. While the
    command is intended for use as a menu option where the object and
    object type are already known, it may be used as a general purpose
    CHGxxx command. Either a system or TAA command is used.

CHGOBJAUT

    The Change Object Authority command allows changes to authority
    for one, generic, or *ALL objects in a library of a specific type,
    or all types. A list of up to 50 users may be specified for
    specific authorities or to remove all authorities.

CHGOBJAUTL

    The Change Object Authorization List command changes the
    authorization list for one, generic, or all objects in a library.
    The authorization list may also be set to *NONE. This simplifies
    making mass changes.

CHGOBJAUT2

    The Change Object Authority 2 command changes the *PUBLIC user of
    an object to the CRTAUT value of the library where the object
    exists. If the library value is *SYSVAL, the QCRTAUT system value
    is accessed and used. CHGOBJAUT2 allows existing objects to have
    their authority changed to adhere to the library default.

CHGOBJD2

    Change Object Description 2. Provides a simple interface to the
    QLICOBJD API. It allows changes to program attributes such as the
    source file/lib/member used for the create, the user attribute
    (not the object attribute), PTF and APAR information, etc. You
    must be authorized to the TAACHGOBJ2 authorization list to use the
    command. Useful for developers of packages and for some internal
    control situations.

CHGOBJD3

    The Change Object Description 3 command provides an interactive
    display to allow any object text to be changed. The user must be
    authorized to change the object. The text is shown as a 50 byte
    field with a ruler above. This makes it simpler to make changes
    such as to a specific position in the User Profile Text
    description as described in the PAGSEP tool.

CHGOBJD4

    The Change Object Description 4 command provides a general purpose
    solution when a program wants to prompt for a CHGxxx command. Only
    typical object types and attributes are supported. Assuming you
    have provided a proper interface to CHGOBJD4, the command will
    complete normally whether the change has been made, the command
    prompt was cancelled, or the command failed. The ESCMSGID
    parameter will be blank if a successful change was made.

CHGOBJOWN2

    The Change Object Owner 2 command is similar to the system
    CHGOBJOWN command except that generically named objects and all
    object types can be changed with a single command. This simplifies
    changing ownership of generic objects.

CHGOBJSRC

    The Change Object Source command provides a simple method of
    changing the source information in an object to reflect the
    information from a specified member. The command is intended for
    the case where an object is created from temporary source and you
    want the object to reflect the actual source. The user must be
    authorized to the TAACHGOBJ2 authorization list.

CHGOUTQ2

    The Change Out Queue 2 command allows a change of one or
    more *OUTQ object types. Not all keywords used by CHGOUTQ are
    supported. CHGOUTQ2 simplifies making mass changes to *OUTQ
    objects. For a more complete understanding of the parameters, see
    the CHGOUTQ command help text. An *OUTQ object owned by one of the
    system profiles may not be changed.

CHGOWNOBJ

    Change Owned Objects. This command transfers the ownership of
    objects from one user to another. No QDOC documents are
    transferred. There is system support on the DLTUSRPRF command to
    perform this, but it deletes the named profile. CHGOWNOBJ offers a
    subset function. A spooled file lists all of the changes.

CHGOWNTAP

    The Change Owner from Tape command provides a 'fix up' of
    ownership. CHGOWNTAP is designed for the case where object
    ownership has been changed and you want to reset the ownership to
    the owner that exists on a save tape. A listing is produced with
    one line for each object with flags for those objects that were
    changed or could not be changed. You must be authorized to change
    ownership of the individual objects.

CHGPF2

    The Change Physical File 2 command allows changes to one, generic,
    or all physical files in a library. Only the typical parameters
    that are changed by CHGPF are supported by CHGPF2. An omit list of
    files may be specified.

CHGPGM2

    The Change Program 2 command allows a change to one or more *PGM
    object types. Not all of the CHGPGM parameters are supported.
    CHGPGM2 simplifies making mass changes to *PGM objects. For a more
    complete understanding of the parameters, see the CHGPGM2 command
    help text. A *PGM object owned by one of the system profiles may
    not be changed.

CHGPRDLIB

    Change Product Library. Provides a method of placing one or two
    libraries in the Product Library position of the library list.
    This can be advantageous when application programs use RPLLIBL to
    change the library list and you want to ensure that a standard
    library exists. The QLICHGLL API is used to make the change. The
    other portions of the library list remain unchanged.

CHGPRFPUB

    The Change User Profile to *PUBLIC command is designed for the
    situation where the objects in a library for the *PUBLIC user have
    different forms of authority and you want to authorize a new user
    profile to have the same authority as the *PUBLIC user. This would
    allow you to make the new user profile a group profile for
    designated profiles and then set the *PUBLIC user to *EXCLUDE to
    prevent access by non-authorized users.

CHGPRFPUB2

    The Change User Profile to *PUBLIC 2 command is designed for the
    situation where IFS objects in a directory for the *PUBLIC user
    have different forms of authority and you want to authorize a new
    user profile to have the same authority as the *PUBLIC user. This
    would allow you to make the new user profile a group profile for
    designated profiles and then set the *PUBLIC user to *EXCLUDE to
    prevent access by non-authorized users.

CHGPUBAUT

    Change public authority. Changes the authority for the *PUBLIC
    user for all or generic objects of all or a specific object type
    in a library. An option exists to bypass those objects where the
    public obtains its authorization from an authorization list.
    Useful for gaining consistent authorization in a library.

CHGPWDA

    The Change Password Attributes command provides separate
    parameters for each of the QPWDxxx system values. A prompt
    override program is used to prime the parameter values so that you
    may key over existing values. You must have *ALLOBJ and *SECADM
    special authorities to use CHGPWDA.

CHGQDFTJRN

    The Change QDFTJRN Data Area command creates and/or changes the
    QDFTJRN data area in a named library. The QDFTJRN data area is
    used by the system to automatically start journaling for objects
    intended for remote journaling. Using CHGQDFTJRN simplifies
    entering data into the required data area.

CHGQHST

    The Change QHST Version command creates a new version of a QHST
    file. The intent of the tool is to allow you to run the command at
    the end of some time period where you want to back up complete
    versions of QHST such as all for the previous month and start a
    new time period.

CHGRPGCPY

    The Change RPG /COPY (CHGRPGCPY) command allows changes to /COPY
    statements in RPG for one, generic, or all members of a source
    file. The CHGRPGCPY2 exists for RPGLE source which also handles
    /INCLUDE. The default is OPTION(*CHECK) which means no changes are
    made and the listing describes what changes would be made.
    Selection criteria exists for the file, library, or member names
    in the existing /COPY statement.

CHGSAVF2

    The Change Save File 2 command allows a change to one or more save
    files. Not all of the CHGSAVF parameters are supported. CHGSAVF2
    simplifies making mass changes to save files. For a more complete
    understanding of the parameters, see the CHGSAVF command help
    text. A save file owned by one of the system profiles may not be
    changed.

CHGSGNDAT

    The Change Signon Date command is intended for the case where a
    user profile swap has occurred and the user profile should be
    updated so that the current date and time becomes the signon
    date/time value. CHGSGNDAT may also be used without a profile swap
    to update the current profile if an option is specified. CHGSGNDAT
    may only be used in a CL program. The QSYCHGPR API is used.

CHGSGNERRT

    The Change Signon Error Text tool allows changing of the error
    message text for the two invalid signon messages. CHGSGNERRT
    changes the text to a common value. The default text is 'Invalid
    signon.' The RSTSGNERRT command restores the message text to the
    original values if needed.

CHGSGNTXT

    The Change Signon Text command allows you to place up to 5 lines
    of text (79 bytes each) on the Signon Display. The text will
    appear the next time the Signon display appears. The text does not
    change if the Signon display is already active. A separate command
    will allow refreshing the Signon display by subsystem. Both 10 and
    128 password Signon displays are supported.

CHGSPLFCPY

    The Change Spooled File Copies command provides a simple change of
    the number of copies for a spooled file. A prompt override program
    exists so the user can see the current value before making the
    change. The intent of the command is to allow a user who should
    not have full CHGSPLFA function to be able to change the number of
    copies.

CHGSPLFORM

    The Change Spooled File Form Type command provides a simple change
    of the form type for a spooled file. A prompt override program
    exists so the user can see the current value before making the
    change. The intent of the command is to allow a user who should
    not have full CHGSPLFA function to be able to change the form
    type.

CHGSPLFPTY

    The Change Spooled File Priority command provides a simple change
    of the output priority for a spooled file. A prompt override
    program exists so the user can see the current value before making
    the change. The intent of the command is to allow a user who
    should not have full CHGSPLFA function to be able to change the
    output priority.

CHGSRCDAT

    Change Source Date. Allows changing of the dates kept on
    individual source statements to appear to be changed on the same
    date. If a source change takes several days to make, the source
    statements will have different change dates. CHGSRCDAT allows a
    range of existing dates to be changed to a consistent date so that
    it will appear as if all changes occurred on a single date. Useful
    for documentation.

CHGSRCFLEN

    The Change Source File Length command converts one, generic, or
    all source files in a library to a source file length that is
    larger than the current length. The typical conversion is 92 to
    112. The same text, owner, and authorities are retained. All
    existing source members are copied. Conversion to shorter lengths
    is valid if no data will be truncated.

CHGSRCTYP

    Change Source Type. Change all or specified source types in a
    source file to a new type. This avoids having to manually change
    all of the source types such as RPG38 to RPG.

CHGSYSTXT

    The Change System Library Text command allows the text
    descriptions of certain system libraries to be changed to the
    system supplied value as seen with GO LICPGM. Many system
    libraries are shipped with blank text descriptions. The default
    provides a listing of what would be changed. Other library text
    descriptions such as QDSNX may be optionally changed to English
    text.

CHGTAAKEY

    Change TAA Key. Provides a method of changing the critical
    TAALICENSE data area information. You must enter a special key
    provided by the TAA Productivity Tools owner to successfully
    complete the command.

CHGUSRAUD2

    The Change User Auditing 2 command is similar to the system
    CHGUSRAUD command, but prompts for CHGUSRAUD with the existing
    values from the user profile. This simplifies making additions or
    deletions of the AUDLVL parameter which may contain several items.

CHGUSRPRF2

    Change user profile 2. Provides a simple command for Assistant
    Security Officers who should be limited to the parameters they can
    change within a user profile. Cannot be used to change sensitive
    profiles such as QSECOFR. The Security Officer controls the valid
    parameters by entering them in a data area. CHGUSRPRF2 is an
    option on the SECOFR2 tool menu.

CHGUSRPRF3

    The Change User Profile 3 command is a front end to the CHGUSRPRF
    command that allows a list of up to 300 user profile names or
    generic names to be changed. Most of the parameters from CHGUSRPRF
    are supported. This simplifies making mass changes to user
    profiles or for standardizing users of a department.

CHGUSRPWD

    Change User Password. Allows changing profile passwords or
    document passwords and replicating the changes on other systems.
    The password is masked and easily sent using SBMRMTCMD. Unmasking
    occurs on the other system. Useful for keeping multiple systems in
    synch with the same passwords.

CHGUSRPWD3

    The Change User Password 3 command allows a command change of a
    user password that ensures the QPWDxxx system value requirements
    are met. For example, if you have specified that a required digit
    exist by use of QPWDRQDDGT. This allows a change to be made by
    other than the interactive user that still follows your password
    requirements. CHGUSRPRF can change a password, but does not check
    the system values.

CHGUSRSPC

    The Change User Space command allows you to change the contents of
    a user space. A maximum of 5000 bytes can be changed on a single
    command. A start position must be named and an optional length.

CHG128PWD

    The Change 128 Password command is intended for those environments
    using 128 byte passwords where a change to a user password should
    be replicated on one or more systems.

CHKACTJOB

    The Check Active Job command determines whether a job or generic
    job name is active. This can be helpful in determining if a server
    job is active. TAA9893 is sent as an escape message if the
    specified parameters do not find a job.

CHKACTOBJ

    Check Active Object. Simple technique for determining if an object
    can be locked to an *EXCL state (is anyone using the object). The
    command attempts to lock the object and if successful, it unlocks
    it. Limited to certain object types. Useful for a quick
    determination if an object is in use.

CHKACTPGM

    Check Active Program. Simple technique to include in a CL program
    to determine if the program is already active. Useful for programs
    which must run in a single job at a time.

CHKACTUSR

    Check Active User. Provides a method of determining if a user is
    active on the system. Return variables exist for how many
    interactive and batch jobs are currently in operation for the
    specified user profile.

CHKACTUSR2

    The Check Active User 2 command is designed for the situation
    where you periodically want to check for a list of users to see if
    they are active. On the first use or when RESET(*YES) is
    specified, a file is built in QTEMP of the active users. The file
    is then checked to see if the specified user is active and if not,
    an escape message is issued. On subsequent uses with RESET(*NO),
    only the file is checked.

CHKALLDBD

    The Check All Data Base File Dependencies command checks all files
    or all files in all user libraries for the situation where
    the -Based on- physical file is in a library other than the
    dependent file. Keeping the -Based on- physicals in the same
    library is very helpful when attempting to restore on an
    initialized system or on another system.

CHKALLOBJ

    Check All Object. Determines if the current user profile
    (including any Group Profile and Program Adoption) has *ALLOBJ
    special authority. An escape message (CPF9898) is issued if not.
    The command is useful in jobs where the user requests to run
    against all libraries or all user libraries.

CHKALLOBJO

    The Check *ALLOBJ Owner command checks the owner of an object to
    ensure he has *ALLOBJ special authority. For example, if a user
    with *ALLOBJ authority creates a program with USRPRF(*OWNER), but
    the user is part of a group that does not have *ALLOBJ and the
    group profile becomes the owner, the program will not run
    with *ALLOBJ authority. CHKALLOBJO can be used as part of the
    create step to ensure the proper create of a program.

CHKAPOST

    Check for Apostrophes within a value. The command is used by
    several TAA tools to ensure double apostrophes and also removes
    leading or trailing apostrophes. Useful for prompting for a string
    value (e.g. the TEXT parameter) which needs surrounding
    apostrophes and may have an embedded apostrophe.

CHKARACDE

    The Check Area Code command provides a method of checking for a
    valid area code. The TAA9891 escape message is sent if the area
    code is invalid. An optional completion message is provided. Only
    the area codes provided by the PRTARACDE tool are supported
    (includes US, Canada, Caribbean, Samoa, etc).

CHKARAFLD

    The Check Area Code Field command checks a named field in a data
    base file for a valid area code. Depending on the field type,
    different lengths are valid. Only the area codes provided by the
    PRTARACDE tool are supported (includes US, Canada, Caribbean,
    Samoa, etc).

CHKARASPE

    The Check Data Area Spelling command checks for misspelled words
    in a *CHAR type data area (*DTAARA). The data in the data area
    would be considered as a string with blanks separating the words.
    The dictionary supplied by TAA is used by default. Special
    dictionaries may be named. See the discussion with the TAADCT
    tool.

CHKASPOBJ

    Check ASP Objects. The command is intended to assist you in
    migrating from the old style ASPs (where few object types can
    exist in an ASP) to the new style. The command finds all of the
    objects that are in an ASP where the library is not in the same
    ASP.

CHKASPSTG

    The Check ASP Storage command allows you to check a percentage of
    available storage in an ASP against the size of objects you need
    to create. An escape message (TAA9896) is sent if the amount of
    requested storage exceeds a specified percent of available
    storage. This can be useful when an application needs to duplicate
    a large object in QTEMP.

CHKASPTHD

    The Check ASP (Auxiliary Storage Pool) Threshold tool provides an
    additional method of notifying the system operator when an ASP has
    reached its threshold of storage used. A message is sent to
    QSYSOPR (or a named message queue) that describes the current
    percentage and remaining storage available. In addition, a
    separate threshold percentage may be named in conjunction with the
    SHOUT tool.

CHKAUDAUT

    The Check *AUDIT Special Authority command checks if the user
    (including group authority and adopted authority) has *AUDIT
    special authority. The command completes normally with no feedback
    if the user has *AUDIT authority. If the user does not have *AUDIT
    authority, TAA9891 is sent as an escape message.

CHKAUDLOGP

    The Check AUDLOGP command checks audit entries for valid changes
    to the AUDLOG TAA Tool AUDLOGP file. CHKAUDLOGP helps ensure that
    the AUDLOGP file is a true representation of the QAUDJRN journal.
    You must be using the QAUDJRN journal and the AUDLOG tool.

CHKAUDVAL

    The Check Audit Value command checks a list of specified audit
    value such as *AUTFAIL against the values in the QAUDLVL and
    QAUDLVL2 system values. If one of the specified values does not
    exist, TAA9891 is sent as an escape message.

CHKBIT

    The Check Bit command checks one or more bits in a byte for an on
    or off value ('1' or '0'). The bit positions are labeled 1-8 with
    1 being the high order bit. TAA9892 is sent if the bits do not
    match the requested values.

CHKBLKFLD

    The Check Blank Fields command checks all values for each field in
    a file to determine if only blanks exist for character fields or
    zeros for decimal fields. This is intended as a debugging aid to
    check if a program that 'adds new records' is populating the
    correct fields. If only some records in the file contain values,
    the field is flagged with a different code.

CHKBOF

    The Check Based on File command checks the logical files in a
    library to determine if they are based on physical files in the
    same library. A spooled file lists any exceptions. CHKDBD is the
    companion tool which checks physical files to determine if any
    dependent logicals exist outside the library. To check all
    libraries, use the CHKALLDBD tool.

CHKCCSID

    The Check CCSID command checks one, generic, or all objects in a
    library for a specified CCSID. An escape message (TAA9891) is sent
    if any exceptions exist and a listing is displayed. Only the
    object types that support a CCSID are checked.

CHKCFGCHG

    Check Configuration Change. Checks the configuration objects for
    those that have changed since a specified date and sends messages
    for those exceeding the date. This allows a simple review of what
    has recently changed.

CHKCLSPE

    The Check CL Spelling command checks words within quotes in any CL
    type source. For example, words within parameter values for
    keywords such as TEXT or MSG can be checked for misspellings. The
    system Dictionary product is not a requirement as the TAADFT
    dictionary may be used. A spooled file is created if any spelling
    errors exist.

CHKCMD

    The Check Command command provides the functions of QCMDCHK with
    additional options provided by the QCAPCMD API. This includes 1)
    Prompting for the command on missing required parameters or some
    invalid entries and 2) Limited user checking. The command is not
    run, but can be useful when attempting to simulate a command line
    on a menu.

CHKCMDDFT

    The Check Command Default command checks commands in one or more
    libraries to determine if the system supplied CHGCMDDFT command
    was used. Some commands cannot be checked and are flagged.

CHKCMDQLFN

    The Check Command Qualified Name command checks the parameters
    from CRTCMD that support qualified names to ensure that if a
    program is specified that the library qualifier is not *LIBL.
    Using *LIBL from a command that is used in a program that adopts
    authority presents a security exposure where a bogus program could
    be used.

CHKCMDSPE

    The Check Command Spelling command checks words within quotes in
    CMD type source. For example, words within 'prompt text' or
    'choice text' can be checked for misspellings. A spooled file is
    created if any spelling errors exist. The system Dictionary
    product is not a requirement as the TAADFT dictionary may be used.

CHKCMDSRC

    The Check Command Source command checks for whether the source
    used to create the command objects still exists. 'Down level'
    conditions where the source has been changed after the command was
    created are flagged. CHKCMDSRC can be helpful in determining if
    your commands are synchronized between source and object.

CHKCPPAUT

    The Check CPP Authority command checks command objects in one or
    more libraries that are specified as *PUBLIC *EXCLUDE. If the
    Command Processing Program (CPP) is not *PUBLIC *EXCLUDE, the
    command is flagged. If your intent is to prevent access by
    the *PUBLIC user to a command, the CPP should also be considered
    for *PUBLIC *EXCLUDE to prevent the use of the CALL command to the
    CPP.

CHKCPPQSYS

    The Check CPP use of QSYS command checks all the commands on the
    system for non-system commands that use a CPP from QSYS. This
    helps ensure the integrity of your system.

CHKDAT

    Check Date. Checks a date field to ensure it is valid. Allows for
    range check and a year check. Useful for date validation.

CHKDAT2

    The CHKDAT2 command provides a method of performing validation
    against a date field. Not only must the date be valid, but
    optional parameters allow you to perform some range checking on
    the value entered. Any system supported date format may be used.

CHKDAT3

    The Check Date 3 tool provides a command to check dates. The major
    intent of the tool is to call the processing program from a HLL
    program and pass it an Externally Described Data Structure of
    information and receive a message back in the Data Structure.

CHKDBD

    Check Data Base Dependencies. Checks for any physical files in the
    library you are checking that have dependent logicals in other
    libraries. CHKBOF is the companion command to check for logical
    files in the library you are checking that are 'based on' a
    physical in a different library. To check all libraries, use the
    CHKALLDBD tool.

CHKDBF

    Check Data Base File. Optional return variables such as Member and
    library name, source or data file, physical or logical file,
    number of records and record length. Most of the function can now
    be achieved more efficiently with the system supported RTVMBRD
    command.

CHKDBFDAT

    The Check Data Base File Date command checks one or more date
    fields in a file for valid dates. A spooled file is created with
    any errors. The file must be externally described. A variety of
    date formats can be specified such as MMDDYY, DDMMYYYY, ISO, USA,
    etc.

CHKDBFMBR

    The Check Data Base File Member command simplifies checking for a
    data base file and authority to it. This provides clear messages
    when the file or member does not exist, the file is not the
    requested file type, or the user does not have the proper
    authorization.

CHKDDSSPE

    Check DDS Spelling. Checks the spelling of DDS literals used in
    DSPF or PRTF source types in one or all members in a source file.
    The system Dictionary product is not a requirement as the TAADFT
    dictionary may be used. Useful for cleaning up code to avoid
    careless errors that end users love to find.

CHKDEC

    The Check Decimal command checks a string of up to 512 bytes for
    whether only digits 0-9 exist. Embedded blanks are considered
    invalid. A check for a leading and trailing minus sign is
    optional.

CHKDIRE

    The Check Directory Entry command checks the directory (see
    WRKDIRE) using the outfile of DSPDIRE to determine if the full
    user ID (ID, address, and description) exist. If not, TAA9894 is
    sent as an escape message.

CHKDUPAP

    The Check Duplicate Access Path command checks for files in one or
    more libraries that have a duplicate access path with another
    file. The system will automatically share an access path if it
    can. Complete duplicates and partial duplicates (where only the
    high order keys are the same) are listed. The purpose of CHKDUPAP
    is to assist in cleaning up objects that are not needed.

CHKDUPLST

    The Check for Duplicates in a List command is used to check
    command parameters that are simple lists to ensure that each entry
    in the list is unique. Only the first duplicate found is described
    with the TAA9896

CHKDUPOBJ

    The Check Duplicate Object command checks for duplicate object
    type/names in multiple libraries. A listing is output describing
    the duplicate groups. This can be helpful when attempting to clean
    up the system or solving problems.

CHKDUPSPLF

    The Check Duplicate Spooled File command checks an outfile created
    by CVTOUTQ for duplicate spooled files. The check is made on the
    qualified job name, the spooled file name, and spooled file
    number. CHKDUPSPLF is intended for the case where the system may
    be creating duplicates.

CHKFILATR

    The Check File Attribute command provides a simple check of an
    existing file to ensure it has an attribute that you want to
    process. A list of one or more valid file attributes must be
    provided. If the attribute of the named file is not in the list,
    TAA9896 is sent as an escape message.

CHKFILSRC

    The Check File Source command checks for whether the source used
    to create the objects still exists. 'Down level' conditions where
    the source has been changed after the file was created are
    flagged. CHKFILSRC can be helpful in determining if your files are
    synchronized between source and object.

CHKFLDSPE

    The Check Field Spelling command checks the spelling of a field in
    a data base file. The field must be of a character type and can
    contain up to 5000 bytes. A spooled file is printed of any
    misspelled words found. The system Dictionary product is not a
    requirement as the TAADFT dictionary may be used.

CHKFMT

    The Check Format command checks for a format and/or level ID in a
    file. File types that support formats may be specified. A specific
    format may be named or the special value *FIRST. Different escape
    messages are sent if the format does not exist or the level ID
    does not match. No completion message is sent if the command
    completes normally.

CHKGENERC

    Check Generic. Checks a variable to see if it contains a generic
    value (e.g. ABC*). Returns the length of the field. Useful when
    working with generic requests.

CHKGENOBJ

    The Check Generic Objects command provides a method of checking if
    any generic objects exist for a specific name. The default is to
    check for all object types. A return count is optional. TAA9893 is
    sent if no generic object names exist.

CHKGRPPRF

    The Check Group Profile command checks a profile to see if it is a
    group profile. TAA9891 is sent as an escape message if the profile
    is not a group profile. You must have *USE authority to the group
    profile to use CHKGRPPRF.

CHKHEX

    The Check Hex command checks a string of hex characters such as
    'C1C2C3' to ensure valid hex characters exist. A string of up to
    512 characters may be checked. You must use the RTNLOC value to
    determine if an error exists. CHKHEX can be helpful when a user is
    entering hex characters which must be validated.

CHKHOLIDAY

    The Check Holiday command allows you to check a list of specific
    holidays against the current system date so that some CL code may
    be bypassed or executed. For example, if a backup is not needed on
    Christmas, you can check and bypass the save. TAA9892 is sent as
    an escape message if the current date is one of the holidays you
    specified.

CHKIASP

    The Check IASP Status command checks that all IASPS are online. An
    omit list of IASPs may be specified. An escape message (TAA9892)
    is issued if all requested IASPs are not online.

CHKIBMLIB

    Check IBM Library. Provides a means in a CL program of determining
    whether a library name is considered an *IBM or *USER library and
    whether the library will be saved by a SAVLIB option (e.g. SAVLIB
    LIB(*ALLUSR)). The command provides a program method of providing
    the information from the SAVLIB chart in the Backup and Recovery
    Guide. Useful for automating backup and following the rules of the
    system function.

CHKIBMPRF

    Check IBM Profile. Provides a means in a CL program of determining
    if a user profile is considered a system profile or not. Useful
    for separating system versus user profiles.

CHKIFSDMG

    The Check IFS Damage command attempts to save one or more
    individual IFS objects to a save file. *DIR, *FLR, and *DOC
    objects are bypassed. Messages are sent for those objects which
    could not be saved. While this is not a perfect solution, the
    messages can be used to indicate damage situations.

CHKIFSE

    The Check IFS Entry command checks for object existence and/or
    verifies the user's authority to an object in the IFS. If the
    object exists and the user has the correct authority to the
    object, the command completes normally. The CHKIFSE command is
    similar to the system CHKOBJ command, but does not check for
    program or group adopt (IFS restriction).

CHKIFSOPN

    The Check IFS Open command provides a method of determining if an
    IFS object is available for a type of use and allows a specified
    type of sharing with other jobs. If the open is successful, the
    file is closed and the command completes normally. If the file
    cannot be opened, TAA9872 is sent as an escape message.

CHKIFSSAV

    The Check IFS Save command displays or prints a listing of IFS
    objects that need to be archived (saved). An outfile is optional.
    Using WRKLNK and option 8 (Display attributes), you can see the
    'Need to archive (System)' information for an IFS object. It is
    changed to 'Yes' when the object is saved with a SAV command
    specifying UPDHST(*YES). CHKIFSSAV allows a review of the objects
    needed to be saved.

CHKIFSSPE

    The Check IFS Spelling command checks the spelling of the data in
    a stream file. The data is converted to the TAA240 source file in
    QTEMP and the TAA CHKSPELL2 command is used to check the spelling.
    Error indications appear with sequence numbers as if the data was
    in a source file. The data is limited to 240 bytes wide for the
    stream file.

CHKINACT

    The Check Inactive tool provides a function to end or discontinue
    inactive interactive jobs. The typical example is where the user
    has walked away from the workstation without signing off. The
    system values QINACTITV and QINACTMSGQ are used plus a standard
    program which runs continuously in batch. A list of exception
    devices/users may be specified and a list of 'run status' values
    may be used to check whether to perform an action on the job.

CHKINACT2

    The Check Inactive Job 2 tool is a series of commands that allow
    the ending or discontinuing of jobs that have been inactive for a
    specified period of time. This allows security control when users
    walk away from their devices while still signed on. It may also be
    used to end jobs that are hung. CHKINACT2 allows for different
    timeout values while the CHKINACT tool has a single timeout value.

CHKJLGMSG

    Check Job Log Message ID. Provides a program solution for
    determining if one or more message IDs exist in a job log. This
    can be useful in determining whether the job log should be printed
    or deleted.

CHKJOBACGP

    The Check JOBACGP command checks audit entries for valid changes
    to the JOBACG TAA Tool JOBACGP file. CHKJOBACGP helps ensure that
    the JOBACGP file is a true representation of the QACGJRN journal.
    You must be using the QACGJRN journal and have set auditing for
    the JOBACGP file.

CHKJOBCTL

    Check Job Control Authority. Provides a method of determining if a
    user has *JOBCTL special authority. The checking includes the
    user, group profile authority, and program adopt. Optional user
    error text may appear as the escape message.

CHKJOBDLIB

    The Check Job Description library tool checks for a named library
    in the INLLIBL parameter of one, all, or generic job descriptions.
    This simplifies hunting for a library name.

CHKJOBDUSR

    Check JOBD USER Parameter. Checks the job descriptions in one or
    all libraries for those with a specific user named in the USER
    parameter. Shows the authority to the JOBD object. Useful for
    security review.

CHKJOBENDS

    The Check Job End Status command is intended for batch jobs that
    are waiting for a delay time and periodically need to check if an
    End Job or End Subsystem command has issued a controlled cancel -
    OPTION(*CNTRLD). CHKJOBENDS allows a periodic wakeup with a total
    time specified. The escape message TAA9891 is sent if a controlled
    cancel has been requested.

CHKJOBFNC

    The Check Job Function command checks for an active job having a
    specific Function type-description as seen with WRKACTJOB such as
    'PGM-xxx'. Multiple jobs may satisfy the request. A job name is
    required. Both the Function type and the Function description are
    optional.

CHKJOBMSGW

    The Check Job Message Wait command allows you to send a
    notification when a job is waiting for a response to a message
    (MSGW status). The notification can be one or more of 1) Send a
    break message to a message queue on the current system, 2) Send a
    break message to a workstation on a different system (using FTP),
    3) Send an Email to a user (using TAA tool SNDTXTMAIL)

CHKJOBSTS

    The Check Job Status command provides a simple test to determine
    if a job exists and what the status is (such as *JOBQ, *ACTIVE,
    or *OUTQ). A job type such as INT or BCH may also be specified. An
    exception message is optional if more than one job meets the
    criteria.

CHKJRNLIB

    The Check Journal Library command checks a library to see if a
    specified list of object types is journaled to a named journal.
    Physical data files, data areas, and data queues may be checked.
    Diagnostic messages are sent for the objects that are not
    journaled and a final escape message occurs if any objects are not
    journaled.

CHKLCKSYSV

    The Check Locked System Value command checks a system value to see
    if it is locked by the DST/SST function. This prevents certain
    system values from being used by CHGSYSVAL (or the Change option
    on WRKSYSVAL). The escape message TAA9896 is sent if the DST/SST
    function has been used and the system value is one that is on the
    list that may be locked. Otherwise, the command completes
    normally.

CHKLEAP

    Check Leap Year. Checks a year to determine if it is a leap year.
    Passes back a Y/N value. The years 1600 - 4000 are supported.

CHKLIBITG

    The Check Library Integrity command checks for integrity of
    objects in a library. CHKLIBITG is a front end to the system
    command CHKOBJITG which checks the owned objects of a user profile
    and creates an outfile of exceptions. The checking ensures such
    things as whether the object is in the proper domain, a
    determination of whether a program or module has been tampered
    with, or whether a CISC program has not yet been converted to
    RISC.

CHKLIBL

    Check Library list. Provides a method of determining if a library
    is anywhere on the current jobs library list. An escape message is
    sent if it is not. Optional return variables exist to assist in
    determining where the library is on the library list. This
    includes the system portion, the product portion, the current
    library, and the user portion. The system allows certain
    combinations.

CHKLIBOWN

    Check Library Owner. Checks ownership of all objects in a library
    for a specified owner. Useful for ensuring consistent ownership in
    libraries and ensuring user objects are not found in system
    libraries.

CHKLMTCPB

    Check User Profiles for Limited Capability *USER types. Provides a
    method of checking or ensuring that all *USER type profiles are
    specified as LMTCPB(*YES).

CHKLVLMSG

    The Check Low Level Message command allows you to monitor for a
    message ID sent by a command that does not send an escape message.
    The message being sent must be from a message file (it cannot be
    an 'impromptu' type). See the example in the tool documentation
    for how to use CHKLVLMSG.

CHKMAILADR

    The Check E-Mail Address command checks the validity of an E-Mail
    address. The local-portion of an address is ensured to have proper
    syntax. The domain-portion is either syntax checked or checked
    using APIs to determine if the domain name exists. To check if the
    domain name actually exists, your system must have access to a
    domain name server.

CHKMAILFLD

    The Check E-Mail Field command checks a field in all records in a
    file for a valid E mail address. A listing is output. The
    local-portion of an address is ensured to have proper syntax. The
    domain-portion is either syntax checked or checked using APIs to
    determine if the domain name exists. To check if the domain name
    actually exists, your system must have access to a domain name
    server.

CHKMBRSPE

    The Check Member Spelling command checks the spelling of the words
    in the member text for all members in one or more files in a
    library. Both source and data members are checked. The command
    defaults to use the dictionary provided by the TAA Productivity
    Tools. A specific dictionary or multiple dictionaries may be used.

CHKMBR2

    Check Member 2. Similar to CHKOBJ, but sends an escape message if
    the member does exist. Useful for simplifying coding when it is
    considered an error if the member exists.

CHKMINRLS

    The Check Minimum Release command finds objects that were created
    with a target release earlier than the one specified on the
    command and determines if the source still exists. *PGM, *MODULE,
    and *SRVPGM objects are checked. All *SQLPKG objects are flagged.
    Objects with creation data may be bypassed. The companion tool to
    re-create the objects is FIXMINRLS. The tool is designed to assist
    in conversion to V6R1M0.

CHKMLTMBR

    The Check Multiple Members command checks one or more files to
    determine those that have more than one member and those that
    allow more than one, but have 0 or 1 members. Exceptions are
    displayed or listed. Source files are implicitly bypassed. Only
    data base data files that can have members are checked (DDM is
    excluded).

CHKMSGDSPE

    The Check Message Description Spelling command checks a single
    message description for the spelling of the first and second level
    text. CHKMSGDSPE is helpful after adding or changing a message
    description. To check the spelling of all message descriptions in
    a file, use CHKMSGSPE.

CHKMSGID

    The Check Message ID command checks if a message ID exists in a
    message file. The command completes normally if the message ID
    exists and sends TAA9891 as an escape message if it does not.

CHKMSGSPE

    The Check Message Spelling command checks the spelling of message
    descriptions in message files. Both 1st and 2nd level text are
    checked. A spooled file is created. The system Dictionary product
    is not a requirement as the TAADFT dictionary may be used.

CHKNAM

    Check Name. Checks for a valid name. Useful for name validation
    within a HLL program.

CHKNAMFLD

    The Check Name Field command allows you to check or update a name
    and address field in a file for names such 'THomas ThuMb' or
    'Thomas thumb' and have them changed to 'Thomas Thumb'. The field
    to be checked is ensured to have the first letter of each word
    capitalized and the remaining letters to be lower case.

CHKNAMFLD2

    The Check Name Field 2 command allows you to check name and
    address values for proper case such as 'THomas ThuMb' or 'Thomas
    thumb' and returns a value of 'Thomas Thumb'. The return value is
    ensured to have the first letter of each word capitalized and the
    remaining letters to be lower case.

CHKOBJALL

    The Check Object All command provides a simple check to see if an
    object name exists on the system. The library qualifier and the
    object type default to *ALL. The TAA9893 escape message is sent if
    the object does not exist.

CHKOBJATR

    The Check Object Attribute command checks for an object attribute
    such as RPG or PF. The value '*ALL' is considered valid. TAA9893
    is sent as an escape message for an invalid attribute. The command
    is useful for checking other command input which allows an object
    attribute.

CHKOBJAUT

    Check Object Authority. Is intended for checking the authority to
    a generic object name or all objects in a library. Useful for
    allowing a security check before proceeding into an application
    function.

CHKOBJDMG

    Check Object Damage. Sanity checks the objects in a library or all
    libraries for damage. The objects are saved one at a time to a
    save file in QTEMP. If damage is detected, it is reported. It is
    still possible for damage to exist and be saved. See the
    discussion with the tool. See also the VALDBF command for better
    damage checking of data base files.

CHKOBJSPE

    The Check Object Spelling command checks the spelling of the words
    in the object text for one or more objects in a library. The
    command defaults to provide the dictionary provided by the TAA
    Productivity Tools. A specific dictionary or multiple dictionaries
    may be used.

CHKOBJSRC

    The Check Object Source tool performs 3 functions: 1) Lists
    objects that were created from source but the source no longer
    exists where it was created from 2) Lists source members which
    have not been used to create an object and 3) Lists source members
    which have been used to create more than a single object. An
    attempt is made to identify 'possible' missing items based on the
    last source change date and time.

CHKOBJTYP

    The Check Object Type command checks an 'Object Type' value to see
    if it is valid. Any object type that can be checked by CHKOBJ is
    considered valid. TAA9896 is sent as an escape message if the
    object type is not valid.

CHKOBJ2

    Check Object 2. Similar to CHKOBJ, but sends an escape message if
    the object does exist. Useful for simplifying coding when it is
    considered an error if the object exists.

CHKOBJ3

    The Check Object 3 command is like the system CHKOBJ command
    except that a better first level message (including the type of
    object) is sent if the object is not found. CHKOBJ sends a CPF9801
    message where the first level text reads 'Object xxxx in library
    yyy not found'. Typical error text from CHKOBJ3 would be 'File
    xxxx in yyy not found'.

CHKOBJ4

    The Check Object 4 command is intended to assist you in
    identifying all the objects of a name or generic name on the
    library list, in a specific library, all libraries, etc. Messages
    are returned when an object is found.

CHKOLDOBJ

    The Check Old Objects command prints a list of objects that have
    not been used since a specified use date. A list of object types
    may be entered. A list of libraries (including generic) or all
    user libraries may be specified along with an omit list. An
    outfile of the old objects is optional.

CHKONEJOB

    The Check One Job command determines if there is only a single job
    at a workstation. The command is intended for those situations
    where you want to ensure that only a single job is active before
    performing some task that will not operate correctly if multiple
    jobs are active. PCs with multiple sessions and non-programmable
    workstations with 'jump' key jobs are not considered.

CHKOWNCHG

    The Check Owner Change command compares the current owner of one
    or more objects to the owner that created the object and displays
    a listing. Those objects with the same owner are bypassed. Options
    exist to process only those owned by a named user or created by a
    named user.

CHKOWNSAVF

    The Check Owner of Save File command checks the objects in a save
    file to see if they are owned by a specified user. If a library
    object is in the save file, it is also checked. An option exists
    to check the owner of the save file. TAA9896 is sent as an escape
    message if a different owner exists.

CHKPASTHR

    The Check for Passthru Job command checks the current job to see
    if it is a passthru job. Escape message TAA9894 is sent if it is
    not a passthru job. The command has no parameters and may only be
    used in the interactive environment.

CHKPGMATR

    The Check Program Attribute command provides a simple check of an
    existing program to ensure it has an attribute that you want to
    process. A list of one or more valid program attributes must be
    provided. If the attribute of the named program is not in the
    list, TAA9896 is sent as an escape message.

CHKPGMOIR

    Check Program OIR. Provides a method of checking a library or
    libraries to ensure that the system DSPPGMREF command will operate
    correctly. A list of program objects in the library is accessed
    and DSPPGMREF is used for each program. Errors are monitored and a
    report prepared. Useful in identifying specific objects if you
    have or suspect damage in the OIR (Object Information Repository)
    of the system which prevents DSPPGMREF from operating correctly.

CHKPGMOWN

    The Check Program Owner command is intended to be included in
    programs which must adopt authority (USRPRF = *OWNER). The command
    allows the program to be checked to ensure that the program still
    uses adopt and that the owner has the specified required special
    authorities.

CHKPGMRLS

    The Check Program Release command allows you to check for programs
    and modules that were created on a specific release. You may run
    the command over multiple or all libraries. Options exist to
    exclude certain releases, omit a list of libraries, and to replace
    the program or module if the source exists.

CHKPGMSRC

    Check Program Source. Checks a program or module and its
    associated source to see if the source still exists and if the
    program is 'down level' from the source. A single
    library, *USRLIBL, or *ALLUSR libraries may be checked. The source
    statements are read to determine the date of last change. A
    replace option is available. Useful for determining if the source
    still exists for the program and module objects and if it is down
    level.

CHKPGMSTK

    Check Program Stack. Allows you to specify a program name and
    determine whether the same program is already in the program
    stack. Useful for programs that cannot be called recursively.

CHKPUBAUTL

    The Check Public Authority to Authorization List command checks an
    authorization list to ensure: 1) the *PUBLIC user is *EXCLUDE and
    2) the *PUBLIC authorization to each object controlled by the
    authorization list matches a command option (the default is *AUTL
    meaning the *PUBLIC user is controlled by the authorization list).
    A spooled file is created with the authorization list, the
    controlled objects and any exceptions.

CHKPWDBLK

    The Check Password Block command provides the same function as the
    system V6R1 support to control users who attempt to change their
    password too frequently. The system supports checking with the use
    of CHGPWD, but not with CHGUSRPRF. CHKPWDBLK is intended to be
    placed in a program that uses CHGUSRPRF to change passwords, but
    also wants to ensure infrequent changes. TAA9897 is sent as an
    escape message if the time limit has not passed.

CHKRMTJRN

    The Check Remote Journal command checks for an *ACTIVE journal
    state of a remote journal. If the state is not *ACTIVE, different
    escape messages are sent to describe the current state (*INACTIVE
    = TAA9895, *FAILED = TAA9896, and *CTLINACT = TAA9897). This
    provides a simple means of testing for the critical ongoing
    requirement that allows remote journaling to be successful.

CHKRPGCALL

    Check RPG CALL. Checks an RPG or RPG38 source member and
    determines if any CALL operation codes exist. If so it sends an
    escape message. Useful for determining if sub-programs are used so
    that a source member can be reviewed in more detail to determine
    what program is called.

CHKRPGCMD

    The Check RPG command checks for the existence of the CRTRPGPGM
    command in library QSYS. This is primarily an internal tool to
    prevent tools from being created by CRTTAATOOL on systems that do
    not have the RPG compiler. If the CRTRPGPGM command does not exist
    in QSYS, CPF9801 is sent as an escape message.

CHKRPGSPE

    Check RPG Spelling. Checks the spelling of RPG literals used in
    output specifications in one or all members in a source file. The
    system Dictionary product is not a requirement as the TAADFT
    dictionary may be used. Useful for cleaning up code to avoid
    careless errors that end users love to find.

CHKRSDSTE

    The Check Restricted State Status command sends an escape message
    if the system is not in the restricted state. The check is against
    the 'system state' and not the status of the controlling subsystem
    as it is possible for the controlling subsystem to be restricted,
    but not have the system in the restricted state.

CHKSAV

    Check Save Strategy. Checks a single library or all libraries and
    compares the save date/time against the last change date/time for
    each object and member. A listing is printed of all those objects
    and members which do not have a current backup. Useful for
    checking your save strategy to ensure you are properly backed up.

CHKSAVDEV

    Check Save Device. The command does a sanity check of the
    Save/Restore device and the system by saving a test data area from
    TAATOOL and restoring it to QTEMP. The value within the two data
    areas and some of the object attributes are compared to help
    ensure that device and system are operating properly. CHKSAVDEV is
    intended to be included at the beginning of your standard backup
    programs.

CHKSAVF

    The Check Save File command is designed to allow you to determine
    if a save file is available for use. For example, if a save is
    occurring to the save file, TAA9892 will be sent as an escape
    message.

CHKSAVRST

    Check Save/Restore Job Log. Checks a job log for important
    save/restore messages. Nets out the job log to allow responsible
    data processing person to review for problems (e.g. damage, object
    not saved or restored, object changed on restore).

CHKSAVSYS

    Check *SAVSYS Special Authority. Determines if the current user
    profile (including any Group Profile and Program Adoption) has
    the *SAVSYS special authority. An escape message (CPF9898) is
    issued if not. The command is useful in jobs where the user needs
    to save or restore and it is not known if he is authorized.

CHKSAVTAP

    Check Save Tape. Checks a save/restore format tape to see if it
    can be read by the system. This is a sanity check only and does
    not ensure that the tape can be properly restored. It does cause
    all of the data on tape to be read by the system which is a better
    test than the system command DSPTAP. Checks save/restore tape
    format which includes any tape media produced by a SAV command, a
    new release tape, or a PTF tape.

CHKSECADM

    The Check *SECADM Special Authority command determines if the user
    has the special authority *SECADM. Group profile, supplemental
    group profiles, and program adoption authority are also
    considered. The *SECADM special authority is needed for various
    functions involving user profiles.

CHKSELOMT

    The Check Select/Omit command allows select and/or omit lists to
    be checked against a name value. The lists may contain generic
    names. A *YES/*NO result field is returned to assist in your
    processing. CHKSELOMT simplifies programming when performing
    select/omit processing of names against lists.

CHKSGNCNT

    The Check Signon Count tool allows you to prevent a signon
    (interactive job) if the number of current signons for a specific
    user profile exceeds a maximum. The supplied TAA program must be
    named in the INLPGM parameter or used in the users initial
    program. A system default and unique user profile values may be
    specified.

CHKSPCAUT

    The Check Special Authorities command allows a check of a specific
    user's special authorities or the current user. If the current
    user is requested 1) the check includes both program adopt and
    group adopt and 2) the check occurs at the previous call level so
    that the current program adopt function is not included.

CHKSPCSPE

    The Check User Space Spelling command checks for misspelled words
    in the first 32,000 bytes of a user space. The data in the user
    space would be considered as a string with blanks separating the
    words. The dictionary supplied by TAA is used by default. Special
    dictionaries may be named. See the discussion with the TAADCT
    tool.

CHKSPELL

    Check spelling. Provides a method of spell checking the data in a
    source member. The system Dictionary product is not a requirement
    as the TAADFT dictionary may be used. Multiple dictionaries may be
    named and dictionaries exist in TAATOOL for your use. A data area
    which names a list of dictionaries may be named (see the CRTDCTARA
    tool).

CHKSPELL2

    Check spelling 2. Provides a method of checking the spelling in a
    string of data. The system Dictionary product is not a requirement
    as the TAADFT dictionary may be used. A command exists, but the
    CPP may also be called directly. If a word is not found in the
    dictionaries specified, it is returned in a parameter along with
    the number of the word in the string. Options exist to start the
    checking after a word.

CHKSPLCTL

    The Check Spool Control Authority command checks for the special
    authority *SPLCTL in the current user profile or as an adopted
    function. If the user does not have the function in his job, the
    CPF9898 escape message is issued. Standard text describing the
    error is the default.

CHKSPLF

    The Check Spooled File command checks for the existence of a
    spooled file and optionally for whether the spooled file is still
    open. If the job exists, but not the spooled file, TAA9883 is sent
    as an escape message. If the job does not exist, TAA9884 is sent
    as an escape message. If the option to check for an open status is
    used and the file is still open, TAA9885 is sent as an escape
    message.

CHKSRCTYP

    Check Source Type. Checks the source types in a source file for
    valid types. No syntax checking will occur in SEU unless SEU
    recognizes a valid source type. Options to check for i5/OS, S/38,
    S/36 or *ALL source types. Useful for ensuring all source types in
    a source file are valid and of a particular type.

CHKSRCTYP2

    The Check Source Type 2 command provides a simple check of an
    existing source member to ensure it has a source type that you
    want to process. A list of one or more valid source types must be
    provided. If the source type of the named member is not in the
    list, TAA9896 is sent as an escape message.

CHKSRCTYP3

    The Check Source Type 3 command checks a value to see if it is a
    valid source type as described by the Programmer Menu. TXT and
    TXT38 are optional.

CHKSTDJOBS

    The Check Standard Jobs command provides a method of determining
    if required system and standard processing jobs are active.
    CHKSTDJOBS operates by using the output of the TAA CVTWRKACT
    command when the system is known to be in a good state and
    checking the jobs to see if they are still active.

CHKSYSCND

    Check System Condition. Monitors the critical system messages
    arriving on the QSYSMSG message queue and uses the SHOUT TAA tool
    to shout at users. Useful for preventing critical system
    conditions from going unnoticed.

CHKS38CMD

    Check S/38 Commands. Checks a set of CL source for commands which
    are not part of S/38 Release 8. The commands to be checked against
    are in a table which can be modified. Useful for situations where
    source must be shipped to another system and you want to determine
    if any user commands exist. Also can be used for enforcing
    standards regarding what commands can appear in a CL program.

CHKTAAAUT

    The Check TAA Authorities command checks the current authorities
    for TAA objects and compares them to the shipped version of the
    product. TAA objects in QSYS may also be included in the check
    such as Authorization Lists. This allows a simple determination of
    what authority changes have been made on your system. This helps
    ensure that the TAA Tools may not be used without proper
    authority.

CHKTAAAUTL

    The Check TAA Authorization Lists command checks to ensure that
    all TAA Authorization Lists are set to *PUBLIC *EXCLUDE. This is
    the recommended setting. Allowing *PUBLIC access to many TAA
    functions such as CPYUSRPRF2 would be considered a security
    violation in most installations. An option exists to change
    to *PUBLIC(*EXCLUDE).

CHKTAACHG

    The Check TAA Changes command helps provide an understanding of
    potential incompatibilities when moving to a new update or version
    of the TAA Productivity Tools. The tool is run automatically at
    the time of install using the last used date of the previous TAA
    commands and a listing is output. The information may not be 100%
    complete, but should provide a review of what you should consider.

CHKTAACHG2

    The Check TAA Change 2 command checks the last change date of
    objects in TAATOOL against the date the TAA version was installed.
    Any objects changed after the install date are listed. This allows
    a review of what has changed since the TAA Productivity Tools were
    installed. An *ALLOBJ user is required.

CHKTAACMD

    The Check TAA Command checks for TAA commands in a source file or
    all source files in a library or all libraries. The command is
    helpful for determining what usage is being made of TAA commands.
    See also the "Determining TAA Tool usage" topic on HELPTAA.

CHKTAACRT

    The Check TAA Create System command provides a check of all
    objects in TAATOOL to determine if they have been created on a
    TAASYSnn system. A listing is produced of any exceptions. It is
    not an error to create your own version of some TAA function, but
    CHKTAACRT provides an auditor with a tool to review if changes
    from the shipped version have occurred.

CHKTAADEP

    The Check TAA Dependencies tool is intended primarily as an
    internal tool used when CRTTAATOOL is run. The command checks a
    list of dependent tools (those that are prerequisites). If a
    dependent tool does not exist, CPF9898 is sent as an escape
    message.

CHKTAALIB

    Check TAA libraries. Provides a sanity check of the TAA
    Productivity Tools by ensuring all objects exist and there are no
    'foreign' objects in the TAA libraries.

CHKTAALIC

    The Check TAA License command provides a simple check to see if a
    valid TAA Productivity Tools license exists. The completion
    message describes whether a full or demonstration license exists.
    If a demonstration license exists, the date the license expires is
    described.

CHKTAAOUTF

    The Check TAA Outfiles command checks for any existing TAA outfile
    names to determine if the level ID is the same as that used by the
    current tool. The command is run automatically when the TAA
    Productivity Tools are installed and may also be run at any time.
    The output listing describes outfiles that may need to be deleted
    for successful tool use.

CHKTAAOWN

    The Check TAA Owner command checks in critical TAA programs that
    the owner has *ALLOBJ authority and if an *AUTL was used on
    CRTTAATOOL that it is still assigned to the object.

CHKTAAPRD

    Check TAA Product. Provides a method of checking for commands on
    the the system that use the same name as the TAA Tool command
    names and objects that begin with the generic name TAA that are
    not part of the TAA Productivity Tools. The output can assist you
    in cleaning up old version of TAA Tools and avoiding name
    conflicts.

CHKTAAQSYS

    The Check for TAA Commands in QSYS command checks for TAA command
    names that have a duplicate name in QSYS. This is intended to
    assist in identifying if a new system command uses the same name
    of an existing TAA command.

CHKTAATOOL

    Check TAA Tool. Provides a problem determination assist by
    creating a spooled file containing the source members of a tool
    and the create information. If an object was not created on a
    TAASYS system, the source create information is also provided.

CHKTAPRDY

    The Check Tape Ready command is designed to be used when an
    unattended save is to take place later. The command will ensure
    that the tapes are ready and are valid to write on. This includes
    an optional check for Volume ID, expiration date, and the
    CHKSAVDEV TAA Tool.

CHKTAP2

    The Check Tape 2 command is similar to the system CHKTAP command.
    Neither the system CHKTAP nor the SAVxxx commands will send an
    inquiry message to the device's message queue if the tape is not
    in a 'ready' status (such as no tape is mounted), the volume ID
    does not exist, the sequence number does not exist, etc. CHKTAP2
    sends an inquiry message requesting a C = Cancel, or R = Retry
    response.

CHKTGTRLS

    The Check Target Release command checks the programs in a library
    to determine if they were created for a release that is more
    current than the minimum release specified on the command. The
    intent of the tool is to check a library prior to a save where the
    TGTRLS parameter is to be used.

CHKTIM

    The Check Time command checks for a valid time in HHMMSS format.
    The time must be in a range of 000000 to 235959. Valid minutes and
    seconds are also checked for. If the time is invalid, the CPF9898
    escape message is sent.

CHKTIMSTM

    The Check Time Stamp tool provides a command to check timestamps
    as defined by the data base type Z fields. The major intent of the
    tool is to call the processing program from a HLL program and pass
    it an Externally Described Data Structure of information and
    receive a message back in the Data Structure.

CHKUSRAUT

    Check User Authority. Checks user authority excluding program
    adoption. One command exists for objects and another for
    authorization lists. Useful for programs that operate under
    program adopt that need to know if the user is actually authorized
    to an object without including program adoptions. The function is
    partially replaced by the CHGPGM USEADPAUT(*NO) function.

CHKUSRCMD

    The Check User Command checks for user commands in a source file
    or all source files in a library or all libraries. Both TAA and
    user commands are identified. The command is helpful for
    determining what usage is being made of user and TAA commands. See
    also the "Determining TAA Tool usage" topic on HELPTAA.

CHKUSRGRP

    The Check User for Group command checks if a user profile is a
    member of a named group either by the GRPPRF or SUPGRP attributes
    of the profile. TAA9891 is sent as an escape message if the user
    profile is not a member of the group. No completion message occurs
    if the user profile is a member.

CHKUSRSPC

    The Check User Space command is intended to be used after a list
    API writes data into a user space. CHKUSRSPC checks the
    Information Status byte to ensure that the data is completely
    contained within the user space. This is intended for CL programs
    that use a list API which may write more than 16 MB of data and is
    not handled by the program.

CHKVAL

    The Check Value command is intended for the case where the user
    inputs a value to a CL program and the value must be validated.
    CHKVAL offers several checking options that vary depending on the
    type requested. Special values are also supported. Standard error
    text may be used to simplify the explanation of any errors.

CHKWEEK

    Check Week. Checks a data area to see if the value is equal or
    less than the current date. If so, it updates the data area by
    seven until it is passed the current date and returns a positive
    indication. Useful for inclusion in initial programs when specific
    functions should be performed during signon for a particular day
    of the week (such as SBMJOB).

CHKWRD

    The Check Word command checks the spelling of a word. An escape
    message is sent if the word is not in one of the specified TAA
    dictionaries. The default dictionary includes about 80,000 English
    words, places, proper names, system words (eg QCLSRC), TAA words
    (eg ADDDAT), and PRTSEUTXT words (eg PARM1).

CHK1STMBR

    The Check 1st Member command checks one or more files to determine
    if the first member has the same name as the file. Exceptions are
    displayed or listed. Source files are implicitly bypassed. Only
    data base data files that can have members are checked (DDM is
    excluded).

CHK400CMD

    Check i5/OS Commands. Checks CL source for commands which are not
    part of the current i5/OS release. Commands can be added or
    subtracted to the checked list. Useful for situations where source
    must be shipped to another system and you want to determine if any
    user commands exist or for enforcing standards regarding what
    commands can appear in a CL program.

CLCBOOLVAL

    The Calculate Boolean Value command provides input of 2 arguments
    of 4 byte fields and returns the result in either or both a 4 byte
    character value or an 8 byte hexadecimal value. The operation
    performed can be *OR, *AND, XOR, *NOR, *NAND, or *NOT. The
    arguments must be 1-4 byte *CHAR type fields. They may be
    variables, literals, or hex values.

CLCDATDIF

    Calculate Date Differences. Calculates the number of days between
    a 'from date' and a 'to date'. Useful for determining the number
    of days between two dates.

CLCDATDIF2

    The Calculate Date Difference 2 command determines the number of
    years, months, and days between 2 dates. This calculation is used
    in the insurance industry. The date formats of the From and To
    dates may differ in format. The two dates must be valid and the
    From date must be less than or equal the To date.

CLCDATDIF3

    The Calculate Date Difference 3 command determines the number of
    days between 2 dates. The date formats of the From and To dates
    may differ in format and all date formats are supported. The two
    dates must be valid and the From date must be less than or equal
    the To date.

CLCDATDIF4

    The Calculate Date Difference 4 command is like CLCDATDIF3, but
    allows a list of one or more day names to be specified. This
    allows an answer to a question such as 'How many Tuesdays and
    Thursdays exist between 2 dates?'

CLCDATTIM

    Calculate date/time is designed to be used when you want to use
    the SBMJOB SCDDATE/SCDTIME parameters to submit a job based on
    hours or minutes from the current date/time or a specified
    date/time. CLCDATTIM determines the new date/time and provides
    return variables.

CLCDATTIM2

    The Calculate Date/Time 2 command returns the difference in terms
    of number of minutes (an optionally the number of seconds) between
    a From date/time and a To date/time. CLCDATTIM2 may be useful when
    determining time differences.

CLCDAYS

    The Calculate Days command allows you to determine how many
    specific days (Sundays, Mondays ... Saturdays) exist between two
    dates. You may name one or more days in the week to be considered.
    For example, you can count the number of Tuesdays and Thursdays
    that exist between two dates (the start and end dates are
    included).

CLCDBFHSH

    The Calculate Data Base File Hash command determines a hash value
    for the data in a data base member. The intent of the command is
    to provide a comparison method for large files on different
    systems without transporting the entire file and making a
    comparison. An optional outfile HASHP may be written. The
    CMPDBFHSH command is supported to compare HASHP files in different
    libraries.

CLCLRGVAR

    The Calculate Large Variable command allows CL to work with
    character variables that exceed 15 bytes in length and contain up
    to 30 digits. Simple operations of Add, Sub, Multiply, and Divide
    are supported. Any values placed in the Factors are right aligned.

CLCMOD10

    The Calculate Modulus 10 command calculates the value for a
    Modulus 10 Self-Check Digit. The command returns a value for the
    self-check digit which is intended to be added to a number such as
    a customer number. DDS supports the CHECK(M10) keyword for a field
    to assist in ensuring the number is keyed correctly.

CLCMOD11

    The Calculate Modulus 11 command calculates the value for a
    Modulus 11 Self-Check Digit. The command returns a value for the
    self-check digit which is intended to be added to a number such as
    a customer number. DDS supports the CHECK(M11) keyword for a field
    to assist in ensuring the number is keyed correctly. Some input
    values cannot produce a Modulus 11 self-check digit and an escape
    message will be sent.

CLCSQRT

    The Calculate Square Root command calculates the square root of a
    numeric value that is greater than 0. The input value should be
    passed as a *DEC (15 5) value which allows numbers such as 123 or
    123.456 to be input. The return value must be specified as *DEC
    LEN(15 5).

CLCTIMDIF

    Calculate Time Differences. Calculates the number of seconds
    between a 'from time' and a 'to time'. Useful for working with
    those commands which only support a wait of a number of seconds
    and you want to wait until a specified time.

CLCTIMZOND

    The Calculate Time Zone Difference command returns the number of
    minutes difference between two time zones. The time zone names as
    used by WRKTIMZON must be input or special values such
    as *PACIFIC. Daylight savings time is considered. An optional
    return value describes the difference in HH:MM format. A minus
    value may be returned.

CLCUCCCHKD

    The Calculate UCC Check Digit command calculates the check digit
    for several UCC standards such as UPC-12 used for most grocery
    items. This can be used to assist in assigning the value for a new
    item.

CLNSYS

    Cleanup System. This command combines the functions of several
    other TAA tools to provide a simple means of cleaning up the
    systems. A batch job is submitted. You can optionally allow the
    following to occur MTNJRN, DLTOLDSPLF, RMVOLDMSG, DLTQHST, and
    DLTOLDQRPL.

CLNTAATEMP

    Cleanup TAA Temporary Files. This command should be used to
    cleanup files that exist in TAATOOL that are used for temporary
    functions. The command can be run in off hours to reduce the
    amount of space on the system.

CLPDBR

    The CLP Data Base Record tool provides a command interface to
    allow a CL program to position to (key or RR), read sequentially,
    read randomly (by key or RR), write, update, and delete data base
    records. A record buffer (string of data) must be provided (the
    tool does not operate on a list of fields).

CLPOUTFILE

    CLP Outfile Processing Code. This is documentation only (including
    sample code) for how to code an outfile in a CL program. The code
    is ready to be copied in from the SEU browse function by
    requesting the CLPOUTFILE member in QATTINFO.

CLPSTDERR

    CLP Standard Error Handling Code. This is documentation (including
    sample code) for how to do standard error handling in a CL
    program. The code is ready to be copied in from the SEU browse
    function. Two forms of the code are provided. The simple form is
    designed for typical user applications. The second form is
    designed for tool use and is the same error handling code as
    available in the DUPSTDSRC tool (it includes other code).

CLPSUBR

    CLP Subroutine code. This is documentation only (including sample
    code) for how to code a subroutine in a CL program. The code is
    ready to be copied in from the SEU browse function by requesting
    the CLPSUBR member in QATTINFO.

CLRALLPFM

    The Clear All Physical File members command clears all members
    that exist in a physical file. You must have *OBJEXIST rights to
    the file and at least one member must exist.

CLRDTAARA

    Clear Data Area. Provides a method of initializing a data
    area. *CHAR types are set to blanks. *DEC types are set to
    zeros. *LGL types are set to '0'.

CLRDTAQ

    The Clear Data Queue command clears a non-keyed data queue of all
    entries. A keyed data queue may be cleared of a specific key or
    all entries. The command uses the API QCLRDTAQ.

CLRGENMBR

    The Clear Generic Members command clears one or more generic
    members in a data base file (either source or data). The system
    supports a generic capability on RMVM, but not on CLRPFM.
    CLRGENMBR provides the missing function to allow cleanup of
    certain files.

CLRGENSRC

    The Clear Generic Source command clears generic members in one or
    more source files in a specified library. Special values such
    as *STD may be used for the source file name to clear generic
    members from source files such as QCLSRC and QCMDSRC. The default
    is ACTION(*CHECK) which describes in messages the members that
    would be cleared.

CLRJOBQ2

    The Clear Job Queue 2 command clears selected jobs from a job
    queue. Jobs may be cleared based on a combination of selection
    criteria such as job, user, status, and priority. At least one
    selection type must be made. A job must satisfy all selection
    types specified to be ended. A 'check option' exists to allow a
    determination of which jobs would be ended.

CLRLFM

    Clear Logical File Member. Clears a logical file member and the
    based on physical members in the best performing method. The
    logical member is added back at the end of the command. Useful for
    those applications which need to reuse physical members each day
    and logical files are built over more than a single physical.

CLRLIB2

    The Clear Library 2 command is like the system CLRLIB command, but
    also clears objects that can cause CLRLIB to fail such as
    dependent logical files in a different library, constraints
    specified by ADDPFCST, receivers that have not been saved, and
    output queues with entries. Some exceptions exist that may prevent
    a cleared library.

CLRMSGQ2

    The Clear Message Queue 2 command allows you to clear messages
    from one or more message queues based on the number of hours a
    message has been on the queue. CLRMSGQ2 may be used for any system
    message queue such as QSYSOPR or QSYSMSG or any user message
    queue. The command defaults to ACTION(*CHECK) to provide an
    indication of what would happen if ACTION(*REMOVE) had been
    specified.

CLROUTQ2

    The Clear Output Queue 2 command clears all but a specified number
    of spooled files from an output queue. The spooled files are first
    sorted in descending sequence by open date/time. The spooled files
    are then read, the specified number are bypassed, and the
    remainder are deleted. CLROUTQ2 simplifies keeping an output queue
    with a manageable number of spooled files.

CLROUTQ3

    The Clear Output Queue 3 command clears selected spooled files
    from an output queue. Spooled files may be deleted based on a
    combination of selection criteria such as job, user, form type,
    status, and priority. At least one selection type must be made. A
    spooled file must satisfy all selection types specified to be
    deleted. A 'check option' exists to allow a determination of which
    spooled files would be deleted.

CLRSTMF

    The Clear Stream File command clears a stream file in the IFS. The
    IFS entry will still exist, but the size of the entry will be 0 as
    seen by the WRKLNK display of attributes for the entry. The TAA
    RTVIFSED command will also return a 0 value for the size.

CLRTAP

    The Clear Tape command clears the information about the tape
    labels on a specified device. This allows new data to be written
    to the tape. Unlike INZTAP, CLRTAP retains the existing Volume ID
    and Owner ID. Because it must access existing information, CLRTAP
    is slower than INZTAP. An option exists on CLRTAP to prompt INZTAP
    using the current values found on the tape.

CLRUSRIDX

    The Clear User Index command clears the entries from an existing
    user index. Any user index may be specified (not just those
    created by the TAA CRTUSRIDX command).

CLRUSRSPC

    The Clear User Space command clears a user space by resetting it
    to the initial value (as specified when the user space was
    created). The full size of the user (may have increased since the
    space was created) is reset.

CMDDTAQ

    Command Data Queue. Allows commands to be asynchronously executed.
    The typical use is for users who are capable of using commands,
    but the function is general purpose and can be used in any
    application. If you are use to entering commands, the Command Data
    Queue can make you more efficient.

CMDEXIT

    The system supports the capability (as of V4R5) to retrieve a
    command that is about to be run or to change a command that is
    about to be run. This function provides significant capability,
    but there are important restrictions. This is no guarantee that
    your exit program will be used for all conditions. This is a
    'documentation only' tool with sample code on how to do an Exit
    program for a command.

CMDLINE

    Command Line. Provides skeleton code for simulating a command line
    on a system menu or display. The functions of command prompting,
    F9, message subfile and logging of commands is provided. Sample
    code describes how to include your own options on the menu. The
    command is used only for testing purposes.

CMPALLSRC

    The Compare All Source command compares one, all, or generic
    source members in one or more source files in a library to the
    same file and members in a different library. A listing is
    produced for each file and the members. If the corresponding
    member does not exist or the data does not match, the member is
    flagged. An option exists for a detail comparison of unmatched
    members.

CMPAUTLAUT

    The Compare Authorization List Authority command compares the
    authorizations from one *AUTL object to another. This includes the
    owner and individual authorities. Differences are noted including
    From *AUTL users who do not exist for the To *AUTL and vice versa.

CMPCLS

    The Compare Class command compares the CRTCLS command parameters
    of two Class objects. A spooled file is created of any
    differences.

CMPCMD

    The Compare Command command compares the CRTCMD command parameters
    of two command definition objects. A spooled file is created of
    any differences.

CMPCMDLST

    The Compare Command List command is intended for the case where a
    command supports both an 'include' and an 'exclude' list of system
    names or generic system names. CMPCMDLST ensures that both lists
    are unique and generic names do not overlap specific names (or
    generic names) in the other list. TAA9896 is sent as an escape
    message for non-unique situations. An option exists to allow
    generic overlap.

CMPCMDPARM

    The Compare Command Parameters command compares the parameter
    lists of the command source against the source for the CPP. A
    single command, a generic command name, or all commands in a
    library may be compared. The CPP must be written in CL or RPG.

CMPDAT

    Compare Date. Compares two dates. Provides optional return values
    for the result (GT LT EQ) and the number of days between. Useful
    for working with date comparisons.

CMPDAT2

    The Compare Date 2 command provides a simple comparison of a
    specified date to the current date plus or minus a number of days.
    A return variable that will contain GE or LT must be specified.
    The command is very efficient if the dates to be compared are in
    the current year. CMPDAT2 provides a simple method of determining
    whether a date is in a range of days from the current date.

CMPDBF

    Compare Data Base file. Compares two data base file members (up to
    9999 record length). Options exist to print in character or hex
    and to compare a range of positions. Differences are noted with
    asterisks. Useful for comparing output that should be identical.

CMPDBFFMT

    The Compare Data Base Formats command compares the format
    information between two data base files. If the formats differ, a
    detail comparison of each field occurs. This can be helpful when
    you have created a program using one file and execute against a
    different file that is supposed to be identical and a level check
    occurs.

CMPDBF2

    The Compare Data Base File 2 command compares two identical format
    unique keyed files and lists the changes to the data for a
    specific field name. CMPDBF2 allows you to make a periodic copy of
    a uniquely keyed file and then compare the current version against
    the last copied version to see the changes for a specific field.

CMPDBF3

    The Compare Data Base File 3 command compares a member from two
    data physical files. The files are copied to temporary files in
    QTEMP and a logical file is built over each file with the key as
    the entire record. The From file is then read and an attempt is
    made to to randomly access the same key in the To file. Exceptions
    are noted. The process then repeats for the To file.

CMPDSPFD

    The Compare Display File Description command compares the CRTDSPF
    command parameters of two Display file objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPDTAARA

    The Compare Data Area command compares the contents of two data
    areas. The attributes of the data area (type, length, and decimal
    positions) must match in order to compare the values. The TAA9895
    escape message is sent if the values do not compare. From and To
    positions may be compared for character data areas.

CMPDTAARAD

    The Compare Data Area Description command compares the CRTDTAARA
    command parameters of two data area objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPDTAQD

    The Compare Data Queue Description command compares the CRTDTAQ
    command parameters of two Data Queue objects. The contents of the
    data queues are not compared. A spooled file is created of any
    differences.

CMPDTAQE

    The Compare Data Queue Entries command compares the entries and
    keys (if any) for two data queues. The intent of the command is to
    allow a comparison when data queue entries are duplicated such as
    in a remote journal environment. The date/time values of when an
    entry was sent are not compared.

CMPIFS

    The Compare IFS command is designed to assist when you want to
    ensure that IFS objects in one or more directories on different
    systems or partitions are the same. The CAPIFS command must be
    used on both systems/partitions to capture the IFS information.
    The two libraries containing the CAPIFS information must exist on
    the same system when CMPIFS run. A spooled file is displayed or
    output with the differences.

CMPIFSED

    The Compare IFS Entry Description command compares the major
    attributes of two IFS objects. A listing is produced if any
    differences exist. An escape message is issued if differences
    exist and the command is run in batch or OUTPUT(*PRINT) is
    specified.

CMPJOBA

    The Compare Job Attributes command compares the attributes of two
    jobs. A display or listing is output of any differences found.
    When two jobs differ in how they operate, CMPJOBA may be helpful
    in identifying why they differ.

CMPJOBD

    The Compare Job Description command compares the CRTJOBD command
    parameters of two Job Description objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPJOBQA

    The Compare Job Queue Attributes command compares the CRTJOBQ
    command parameters of two Job Queue objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPJOBSCDE

    The Compare Job Schedule Entries command may be used to compare
    the values of job schedule entries from two different systems or
    from a previously captured version from the same system. The
    CVTJOBSCDE TAA command must be used to capture the information.

CMPJRNA

    The Compare Journal Attributes command compares the CRTJRN command
    parameters of two Journal objects. A spooled file is created of
    any differences.

CMPJRNIMG2

    The Compare Journal Image 2 command provides a significantly
    better approach to comparing journal images than the system
    CMPJRNIMG command. Instead of comparing record images and packed
    data, CMPJRNIMG2 provides field names and converted values. A
    selected set of field names may be named or all fields in the
    record. CMPJRNIMG2 allows comparisons to be made when only after
    images exist (2 images must exist for the same relative record
    number).

CMPJRNINF

    The Compare Journal Information command is intended for comparing
    journal attribute information from different systems. Both journal
    and attached journal receiver attributes are compared. The
    CVTJRNINF command (part of this tool) must be used to capture the
    information in an outfile. After placing two outfiles from
    different systems on the same system, CMPJRNINF may be used to
    make a comparison.

CMPJRNRCVA

    The Compare Journal Receiver Attributes command compares the
    CRTJRNRCV command parameters of two Journal Receiver objects. A
    spooled file is created of any differences.

CMPLFD

    The Compare Logical File Description command compares the CRTLF
    command parameters of two Logical file objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPLIB

    The Compare Library command compares the contents of two libraries
    for the same objects, same size, same type, etc. Options exist to
    compare the physical file data (both source and non-source).

CMPLIBAUT

    The Compare Library Authority command compares the Create
    Authority for a library to the objects within the library. If the
    authority of the *PUBLIC user differs from the library Create
    Authority, the object is listed. Libraries with an Authorization
    List used for the Create Authority are not supported.

CMPLIBD

    The Compare Library Description command compares the CRTLIB
    command parameters of two Library objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPLIBFMT

    The Compare Library Format command compares one or more physical
    files in one library to the same file names in another library.
    The comparison is done for the number of fields, the record
    length, and the level ID. This can assist in ensuring files that
    are intended to match have the same format in different libraries.

CMPLIBOBJA

    The Compare Library Object Authorities command compares the output
    of two uses of CVTLIBOBJA and prints a list of differences. This
    may be used to compare the authorizations between what should be
    the same library on different systems or a previous version of the
    authorizations from the same library.

CMPLIB2

    The Compare Library 2 command is designed to assist when you want
    to ensure that one or more libraries on different systems or
    partitions are the same. The CAPLIB2 command must be used on both
    systems/partitions to capture object and member information. The
    libraries containing the CAPLIB2 information must exist on the
    same system when CMPLIB2 run. A spooled file is displayed or
    output with the differences.

CMPLSTPARM

    The Compare List Parameters command allows the comparisons of list
    values passed to a CL program from a command that uses two lists.
    The intent of the tool is to be used when a command being checked
    in a CPP supports a list of items to include and a list of items
    to omit. An error occurs if both lists contain the same value.

CMPLVLID

    The Compare Level ID command compares level IDs for one, generic,
    or *ALL files in one library to another. An escape message is
    optional if differences exist. CMPLVLID may be helpful for
    situations such as when a file in a production library must match
    the same file in the test library.

CMPMBRD

    The Compare Member Description command compares attributes of one,
    generic, or all members (either data or source) in two different
    files. Only the member text, number of records, number of deleted
    records, and 'share' attribute are compared. Unmatched member
    names in the To file are flagged. Unmatched member names in the
    From file may be optionally flagged. CMPMBRD may be helpful when
    ensuring member attributes are identical in two files.

CMPMNU

    The Compare Menu command compares the CRTMNU command parameter
    values of two Menu objects. A spooled file is created of any
    differences.

CMPMODA

    The Compare Module Attributes command compares the attributes of
    two module (*MODULE) objects. A spooled file is created of any
    differences.

CMPMSGD

    The Compare Message Descriptions command compares message
    descriptions in one message file to another. Corresponding message
    IDs are checked for in both files and the individual attributes of
    a message description are compared for matching IDs. A range of
    message IDs may be specified. A spooled file is created with any
    differences.

CMPMSGFA

    The Compare Message File Attributes command compares the
    attributes of two Message File objects. A spooled file is created
    of any differences.

CMPMSGQ

    The Compare Message Queue command compares the message text of
    messages in two different message queues. The first 256 bytes of
    each message is compared and any differences are flagged. If you
    are using message queues for an application where the messages are
    data rather than text, CMPMSGQ may be helpful when a duplicate
    message queue is required.

CMPMSGQA

    The Compare Message Queue Attributes command compares the
    attributes of two Message Queue objects. A spooled file is created
    of any differences.

CMPNETA

    The Compare Network Attributes command compares two different uses
    of CVTNETA and describes any differences. Each use of CVTNETA
    creates a named member with one record containing unique fields
    for all of the network attributes. The value of each network
    attribute is compared between the two file/members by CMPNETA.
    CHGNETA of MAXINTSSN to bump it by one, do the compare, and then
    reset MAXINTSSN.

CMPOBJSEC

    The Compare Object Security command compares security from one
    object to another. Individual authorities, ownership, and
    authorization lists are compared. If both objects are *PGM types,
    the USRPRF attribute and the USEADPAUT attribute (set by CHGPGM)
    are also compared.

CMPOBJSEC2

    The Compare Object Security 2 command allows a comparison of one,
    generic, or all objects in a library to a specific object. This
    allows a determination if all security is being handled
    identically for a set of objects. A summary spooled file is output
    with one line for each object checked. Detail spooled files will
    exist for each object where the security differs.

CMPOUTFILE

    The Compare System Outfiles command compares the formats used by
    system outfile commands from the current release to a previous
    release. For example, you may be interested to know if the DSPOBJD
    outfile format has changed in this release. A display or a listing
    is produced. The QA* files in QSYS used for outfile formats are
    compared.

CMPOUTQ

    The Compare Output Queue command compares the major attribute
    information from each spooled file in one or more output queues to
    the same information created on another system. The CAPOUTQ
    command must be used on both systems/partitions to create a
    library with the spooled file information. The two created
    libraries must exist on the same system when CMPOUTQ run. A
    spooled file is displayed or output with the differences.

CMPOUTQA

    The Compare Output Queue Attributes command compares the CRTOUTQ
    command parameters of two Output Queue objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPPFD

    The Compare Physical File Description command compares the CRTPF
    command parameters of two Physical file objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPPGM

    The Compare Program command compares the various Create xxx
    program and CHGPGM command parameters of two program objects. A
    spooled file is created of any differences.

CMPPGMPARM

    The Compare Program Parameter command checks the parameter lists
    between a calling and called programs. Only CL and RPG types are
    supported. A single program, generic programs, or all programs in
    a library may be checked. A summary listing highlights any
    exceptions and a spooled file exists for each call where the
    parameter lists differ.

CMPPRTFD

    The Compare Printer File Description command compares the CRTPRTF
    command parameters of two Printer file objects. A spooled file is
    created of any differences.

CMPREGINF

    The Compare Registration Information command compares two
    different uses of the CVTREGINF command and describes any
    differences. Each use of CVTREGINF creates a named member with one
    record for each combination of exit point and exit program. The
    values of each combination are compared from the two file/members
    by CMPREGINF. This will add an exit program and remove it when
    complete.

CMPRPYLE

    The Compare System Reply List Entries command compares two
    versions of the RPYLSTP file output by CVTRPYLE. This may be used
    to compare against a previous version on the same system or to
    compare against the output from two different systems.

CMPSBSD

    The Compare Subsystem Description command compares the attributes
    and entries of two subsystem descriptions. A spooled file is
    output with the results.

CMPSGNUSE

    The Compare Signon to Last Used command allows a check to see if a
    profile is being used after the last signon date. This could occur
    if the profile name has not signed on since it was used such as in
    a SBMJOB command or a job schedule job. User profiles that are not
    permitted to signon will normally appear.

CMPSPLF

    The Compare Spooled Files command allows the comparison of two
    spooled files. An option exists to bypass certain lines such as
    heading lines where a date or time may have changed. A spooled
    file is output with the differences highlighted.

CMPSPLFA

    The Compare Spooled File Attributes command compares many of the
    spooled file attributes between two spooled files. A display or
    listing is output of any differences found. When two spooled files
    differ in how the output occurs, CMPSPLFA may be helpful in
    identifying the differences.

CMPSRC

    Compare Source. Allows the comparison of two source members and
    prints the differences between the members. Only the differences
    are printed with an indication of whether the statement has been
    Added, Changed, or Deleted. The old version of the tool has been
    renamed to CMPSRC3.

CMPSRCPARM

    The Compare Source Parameters command compares the parameter lists
    between two source members. The command is intended to assist in
    determining that the parameter lists are identical between the
    From and To source members. CMD, CL, and RPG source types are
    supported.

CMPSRC2

    Compare Source Members 2. Simple comparison of two source members
    or all source members in a file. If two members are compared, an
    escape message is sent if any differences exist. The message
    includes the number of statements that differ and the first
    statement that differs. If all members are compared in one file
    versus another, a printed listing occurs with one line per member
    and a summary of the differences found.

CMPSRC3

    Compare Source 3. This is the old version of the command. Compares
    two source file members and prints a listing of all of the
    differences. Added or deleted statements are noted as well as
    identifying the specific changes in some cases. Useful for
    determining what change were actually made and also for a security
    audit to ensure that valid changes are being made to critical
    programs (e.g. Payroll).

CMPSRC4

    The Compare Source 4 command is a front end to CMPSRC2. CMPSRC2
    compares one, generic, or all members in a source file to another
    source file. CMPSRC4 allows all source files (or standard source
    files) to be compared from one library to another library.

CMPSTMF

    The Compare Stream File command compares two stream files and
    lists the From and To records that differ. The named stream files
    are copied to 9999 byte files in QTEMP and compared. If
    differences are found, the data from each record is listed up to
    100 positions.

CMPSTRUP

    The Compare Start Up Program command compares the source between
    the program identified for the QSTRUPPGM system value and the
    QSTRUP program supplied by the system in QSYS. This can help
    identify changes that have occurred after installing a new
    release.

CMPSYSINF

    The Compare System Information tool supports several commands to
    compare different versions of the information in the library
    specified on CRTSYSINF as captured by the CAPSYSINF command. This
    allows a determination of what objects are new, have been deleted,
    or have grown in size more than a specified value. The commands
    CMPSYSINFO, CMPSYSINFM, and CMPSYSINFI are provided.

CMPSYSOBJ

    The Compare System Objects tool is designed to assist in in
    determining potential problems when dealing with multiple systems.
    Because naming conflicts between objects may arise when using
    multiple systems, the CMPSYSOBJ tool may be used to assist in
    determining the conflicts within the QSYS library.

CMPSYSVAL

    The Compare System Values command allows a comparison of system
    values between two systems or two versions converted from the same
    system. The CVTSYSVAL TAA command must be used to capture the
    information on each system in an outfile. CMPSYSVAL then compares
    the information from the two files and prints a listing noting any
    differences.

CMPUSRPRF

    The Compare User Profile command compares the CRTUSRPRF command
    parameters of two user profile objects. A spooled file is created
    of any differences.

CMPUSRPRF2

    The Compare User Profile 2 command compares the information
    between single or multiple user profiles on the current system to
    the same user profile information from a different system or a
    different version on the current system. The DSPUSRPRF outfile
    function must be used to capture the information to be compared.

CMPUSRSPC

    The Compare User Space command allows a comparison of two user
    spaces. The first position where a difference occurs causes the
    command to end with an error message. A start position may be
    named. Different length user spaces may be compared, but the
    difference in lengths is noted.

CMPUSRSPCA

    The Compare User Space Attributes command compares the attributes
    of of two User Space objects. A spooled file is created of any
    differences.

CMPWLDCRD

    The Compare Wild Card command provides a comparison of a system
    name against a compare value that contains fixed and/or floating
    wild cards. The companion command is CHKWLDCRD which is intended
    to be used before performing a function such as a DSPxxx OUTFILE
    or when using a list type API. Additional commands CMPWLDCRD2 and
    CHKWLDCRD2 may be used on any string (up to 500 bytes) such as
    customer names or addresses.

CNFDLTARA

    The Confirm Delete Data Area command provides a confirmation
    display and allows F6 to delete the data area. The attributes of
    the data area are shown along with the Both *CHAR and *DEC (up to
    15 digits) data areas are supported. The QWCRDTAA API is used.

CNFDLTOBJ

    Confirm Delete Object. Provides a front end to most DLT commands.
    A display appears with information from DSPOBJD including the text
    description, size, and last use date. The operator is given a
    choice of confirming the delete or cancelling the request. Useful
    for ensuring you are deleting the intended object.

CNFDLTRCD

    The Confirm Delete Record command allows deleting a record by
    entering a relative record number of a record in a file. A prompt
    appears with the data from the file (characters below X'40 appear
    as blanks). You must confirm the deletion by pressing F6.
    CNFDLTRCD may only be used in an interactive environment.

CNFRMVM

    Confirm Remove Member. Provides a front end to the RMVM command. A
    display appears with information about the member such as the text
    description, number of records, the last change date, etc. The
    first 5 records in the member are also displayed. The operator is
    given the choice of confirming the removal of the member or
    cancelling the request. Useful for ensuring that you are really
    removing the intended member.

CONARR

    Constant array. A set of commands that allow you to create a
    constant array with an optional alternating value that can be
    accessed with a RTV command in a CL program. Useful for short
    lists of items that need to be checked or accessed in a CL
    program.

CPRDBF

    The Compress Data Base File command compresses a single member,
    generic members, all members of a data base file or a save file
    into an output file. CPRDBF is intended for the case where you are
    transmitting data to another system. The amount of reduced space
    is very data dependent, but is generally better than the SAV
    command DTACPR(*YES) function. The companion command is DCPDBF to
    de-compress the data back to its original form.

CPRDLTRCD

    The Compress Deleted Records command moves all active records to
    the front of a data base file member by re-using the deleted
    record space. At the end of the command, all the deleted records
    will be at the back end of the file. The companion tool is
    TRNDLTRCD to move the 'end of data' marker after the last active
    record and reclaim space for the system.

CPYAFPSTMF

    The Copy AFP Resources to Stream File command copies an AFP
    resource such as a page segment to a stream file. This allows a PC
    editor such as InfoPrint Designer to edit the information. The
    stream file would then be copied back and a command such as
    CRTPAGSEG to be run to re-create the original object.

CPYBCKDTAQ

    The Copy Back Data Queue command is intended for refreshing a data
    queue or duplicating the entries to a different data queue. You
    must first convert the entries in the data queue to the DTAQP file
    with the TAA CVTDTAQ command. CPYBCKDTAQ then reads the data from
    the DTAQP file and uses the QSNDDTAQ API to send the entries to a
    named data queue. Both keyed and non-keyed data queues are
    supported.

CPYCHGMBR

    Copy Changed Members. Copies changed members based on a specified
    date/time. Allows copies of source to occur for backup purposes
    even though the file is open for update. Also useful for copying
    changed members for distribution. For example, if you distribute
    changes periodically, CPYCHGMBR provides a simple method of
    copying all of the members that have changed after a specified
    date/time.

CPYCL

    Copy CL. Performs a function similar to RPG /COPY for CL programs
    to copy in standard source. The support differs in that the CPYCL
    command must be used to 'include' the source. If the program is
    created and the standard source has been changed, the CRTCPYCL
    program can be used on an entire library. It will find the
    programs that need to be refreshed by CPYCL and re-create the
    programs. Useful for including standard source in CL programs.

CPYCMD

    The CPYCMD command is designed for Command definition source and
    allows you to copy in source from another member. CPYCMD acts
    somewhat as an 'include' or the RPG /COPY statement. It provides a
    solution for having standard source that will change and must
    appear in several source members.

CPYCVTOUTQ

    The Copy CVTOUTQ command provides a copy with selection of the
    outfile (OUTQP) created by the CVTOUTQ command. CVTOUTQ creates
    one record per spooled file with the attributes of each spooled
    file for all spooled files in an output queue. If an output queue
    contains a large number of spooled files, CPYCVTOUTQ can be used
    to create a subset to allow simpler processing.

CPYDBFDAT

    The Copy Data Base Date command copies records in a data base file
    based on a comparison of a field value and a specified date and
    operator. Different date formats are valid for character, zoned,
    packed, date, or time stamp fields.

CPYDBFDTAQ

    The Copy Data Base File to Data Queue command copies a member of a
    data base file to a data queue. The data queue must be non-keyed
    and have a length less than or equal to 5000 bytes. The QSNDDTAQ
    API is used.

CPYDBFSRC

    The Copy Data Base Source command copies PF and LF source types
    (plus PF38 and LF38) from one source file to another. A generic
    member name may be specified. The system CPYSRCF command does not
    allow a copy by source type.

CPYDIRE

    The Copy Directory Entry command retrieves information about the
    From User ID from the Directory Entries (as seen with WRKDIRE) and
    prompts for a new entry using ADDDIRE. The existing values for the
    From User ID are used as the defaults for ADDDIRE with the
    exceptions of the USRID, USER, and SYSNAME parameters.

CPYDTAARA

    The Copy Data Area Command copies the contents of one data area to
    another. Options exist to create the data area or map from
    different attributes.

CPYDTAQ

    The Copy Data Queue command copies the entries from one data queue
    to another. Both non-keyed and keyed data queues are supported,
    but must be of the same type, must have the same key length, and
    the same sender ID attribute. The entries may be added to or
    replace the entries in the To data queue. The QSNDDTAQ API is
    used.

CPYFOMIT

    The Copy File With Omit command copies from one file/member to
    another and omits records with specified values in a designated
    character field. The To file/member (it may be created) must have
    0 records and have the same definition as the From file. The From
    file/member must not have 0 records. Up to 150 values may be
    specified to be omitted.

CPYFRMCSV

    The Copy From Comma Delimited File tool provides two commands to
    copy comma delimited files (such as from a spread sheet) to an
    externally described file. CPYFRMCSV should be used for one time
    functions or for the first time to help you create a customized
    externally described file. CPYFRMCSV2 should be used when an
    externally described file already exists.

CPYFRMOUTQ

    The Copy From Output Queue command provides a method of storing
    spooled files in a data base file so they can be printed later.
    The type of spooled output that can be copied is limited to normal
    DP type of output (e.g. no graphics) and some spooled attributes
    are not converted. See the comments in the restriction section.
    Also see CVTFRMOUTQ which uses APIs and has no restrictions.

CPYFRMSAVF

    Copy from Save File. This command and the companion command
    CPYTOSAVF allow a save file to be copied to a normal data base
    file for data interchange purposes. The data base file must be a
    physical data file with a record length of 528 bytes. CPYTOSAVF
    can be used on a different system and then a normal restore
    command. Useful for copying data when a S/370 network is used.

CPYFRMSTM2

    The Copy From Stream File 2 command is a front end to the system
    CPYFRMSTMF command. CPYFRMSTM2 uses a normal object prompt for a
    file and member to allow a simple copy from an IFS stream file to
    a data base member or save file. Only a member of a program
    described physical file, a member of a source physical file, or a
    save file may be copied to.

CPYGENSRC

    Copy Generic Source. Copies all members with the same generic
    name. A single source file, standard source files (QCLSRC ...) or
    the TAATOOL source file names (QATTCL ...) may be specified. The
    FROM and TO source files may differ in type. Useful for copying
    source when a set of different source types with the same generic
    name must be copied.

CPYIFSSPLF

    The Copy IFS to Spooled File (CPYIFSSPLF) command creates a
    spooled file from the output of CPYSPLFIFS STMFTYPE(*SYS). The
    intent of the two commands is to allow a spooled file on a source
    system to be converted to the IFS, sent as an attachment to an
    E-mail, received on a target system, downloaded to the IFS, and
    then converted to a spooled file.

CPYJOBLOG

    Copy Job Log. Copies the job log from the current or named job to
    a source member. Only the request messages are copied. Useful for
    taking commands that were entered interactively and placing them
    in a source member to achieve a 'leg up' on creating a CL program.
    Useful with OPNQRYF or any time a complex interactive command or
    series of commands needs to be placed in a CL program.

CPYJOBSCDE

    The Copy Job Schedule Entry command allows you to make a copy of
    an existing job schedule entry to add a new job schedule entry. A
    new text description may be assigned. Any other values to be
    changed must be changed by the CHGJOBSCDE command (such as from
    the WRKJOBSCDE display).

CPYMNYSRCF

    Copy Many Source File Members. Copies many source file members to
    a different file. The command allows a list of members with
    abbreviation types (e.g. *CLP). Each member is copied using
    CPYSRCF. Useful for copying multiple source members involving
    different files.

CPYMSG

    The Copy Message command copies one or more messages with a
    specific message ID from one external message queue to another.
    The message is copied to the To queue by the use of SNDPGMMSG. A
    selection by job, user, and job number may also be made.

CPYMSGQ

    The Copy Message Queue command copies messages from one message
    queue to another. Only *COMP, *DIAG, and *INFO message types are
    copied.

CPYNEWSRCM

    The Copy New Source Member command copies new members from one
    source file to another. A specific member, a generic member, or
    all members may be specified. If the member in the From file does
    not exist in the To file, it is copied to the To file. If it
    exists, it is flagged. A listing always occurs.

CPYNONGEN

    The Copy Non Generic command copies records from one file/member
    to another and bypasses the records containing a list of generic
    values for a named field. This allows 'all but generic xxx' to be
    copied. Most queries do not support a selection by '*NE a generic
    value'. Using CPYNONGEN allows a subset file to be created which
    can then be queried.

CPYNULLFLD

    The Copy Null Fields command copies data from a file that contains
    null fields to a corresponding file that does not have null
    fields. The null values are changed to zeros. You may create the
    corresponding file or replace the data in the file if it already
    exists. CPYNULLFLD may be used to allow functions that do not
    operate on null field files to be used.

CPYPGMQM

    The Copy Program Message Queue Message command copies one or more
    messages from the current job's program message queue to an
    external message queue. You must use RTVMSGKEY to mark the
    boundary of where messages should begin to be sent from. CPYPGMQM
    may be used in special debugging situations or on a normal basis
    to capture problem determination information instead of the entire
    job log.

CPYRFMT

    The Copy and Reformat command provides better reformatting
    capability than the system CPYF command which supports only *MAP
    and *DROP. In addition to *MAP and *DROP functions, CPYRFMT allows
    renaming of a field. The To file must exist.

CPYRPGARR

    The Copy RPG Array command allows the replacement of RPG array
    data in a source member. It is designed for the case where array
    data must exist at compile time and a standard procedure is used
    to create the program. The array data does not have to be the last
    set of values in the source. A 'compare value' must be specified.

CPYSHFLFT

    The Copy and Shift Left command copies a member beginning at a
    specified position to another member. This allows shifting of the
    data to the left. The user must have *ALL authority to the To file
    to use CPYSHFLFT.

CPYSHFSPLF

    The Copy Shift Spooled File command allows you to shift the data
    in a spooled file either left or right and re-prints the spooled
    file. The file must be capable of being copied by CPYSPLF (this
    excludes files with graphic characters).

CPYSPCDBF

    The Copy User Space to Data Base File command copies data from a
    user space to a data base file. The data base file may be up to
    9999 bytes in length. An optional parameter allows copying of less
    than the full space. If the last data in the space is not the full
    length of a record, blanks will be appended.

CPYSPLFDTA

    The Copy Spooled File Data command reads a spooled file and
    outputs a file intended for a spread sheet processor. Selection
    criteria exist so that only columnar data may be output. An option
    exists to include delimiters and column headings. Either a data
    base file or an IFS object may be output.

CPYSPLFIFS

    The Copy Spooled File to IFS command copies a spooled file to the
    IFS as a stream file. The default is to convert the spooled data
    to a plain text format. Options exist to convert to a rich text
    format, an HTML format, or a PDF. This allows further use of
    spooled data to be handled by PC or Internet applications. An
    option exists to convert to a format that can be re-converted to
    spooled file on another system.

CPYSPLF2

    The Copy Spooled File 2 command is like the system CPYSPLF command
    except that it adds blank lines and a new page indication to the
    data base file. If you are going to transfer print lines to some
    other medium, CPYSPLF2 may be helpful.

CPYSPLF3

    The Copy Spooled File 3 command splits a spooled file into
    multiple spooled files based on a change in value of the data at a
    specific line and position of each page. Assume you have a report
    by salesman for all salesmen and want to split the report so there
    is separate spooled file for each salesman. The salesman number
    must be listed at the same location on each page, but does not
    have to be on the first line.

CPYSPLF4

    The Copy Spooled File 4 command splits a spooled file into
    multiple spooled files based on the number of pages specified. For
    example you may have a report with 100 pages and you want to split
    into 10 spooled files of 10 pages each, or you may have a 20 page
    report and you want a separate spooled file for each page.

CPYSPLTXT

    Copy Spool Text. Allows a spool file to be copied to a source
    member. Unlike CPYSPLF, CPYSPLTXT provides blank source lines to
    simulate spacing. An option allows the invoking of SEU to modify
    the data and reprint the file. Useful for documentation needs when
    display output is needed in text documents.

CPYSRCF2

    Copy source file 2. The command is similar to the system CPYSRCF
    command. The major difference is that a corresponding member in
    the To file is first copied to an Old Version file. This allows a
    backup of what is being replaced or a swap. A single member,
    generic members or all members in the From file may be specified.

CPYSRCHDR

    The Copy Source Header command copies a standard source header
    (several lines of comments) for the heading section of a new or
    existing source member. Some of the values in the header are
    updated by the command. The intent of the command is that the
    programmer would begin a new member by using CPYSRCHDR. Standard
    PDM options exist. A method of tailoring the standard headers is
    provided for.

CPYSRCTYP

    Copy Source Type. The command copies one or more specified source
    types from one source file to another. A generic member name may
    be requested. An option exists to remove the 'copied from'
    members.

CPYSYSINF

    The Compare System Information tool supports several commands to
    compare different versions of the information in the library
    specified on CRTSYSINF as captured by the CAPSYSINF command. This
    allows a determination of what objects are new, have been deleted,
    or have grown in size more than a specified value. The commands
    CPYSYSINFO, CPYSYSINFM, and CPYSYSINFI are provided.

CPYTAADDS

    The Copy TAA DDS command is primarily an internal tool used by
    CRTxxx commands such as CRTSRCCTL. It allows the create to occur
    using the default of SRCLIB(*TAAARC) regardless of whether a full
    or demonstration license exists.

CPYTAATOOL

    Copy TAA Tool. Copies the source members of a specific TAA tool to
    a different library. Useful for modifying the code associated with
    a specific tool. The new library must contain the QATT source
    files (e.g. QATTCL and QATTDDS).

CPYTOCSV

    The Copy to CSV command copies from an externally described data
    base file to a stream file and adds delimiters. The intent is to
    make a stream file for a spread sheet processor. Options exist to
    add delimiters at the end of fields, surround fields with quotes,
    and to include column headings.

CPYTOFLAT

    The Copy to Flat File command copies an externally described file
    to a flat file (a single field file). Decimal and binary fields
    are converted to character and an extra position is added for the
    sign value for all decimal fields. The flat file must not exist
    and is created by the command with a length large enough to hold
    the data. CPYTOFLAT can make a human readable data base file.

CPYTOSTMF2

    The Copy To Stream File 2 command is a front end to the system
    CPYTOSTMF command. CPYTOSTMF2 uses a normal object prompt for a
    file and member. The TOSTMF name defaults to allow a simple copy
    from a data base member to an IFS stream file in the user's home
    directory. Only a member of a program described physical file, a
    member of a source physical file, or a save file may be copied.

CPYUNQKEY

    The Copy Unique Key Records command copies unmatched keyed records
    from one file to another. Both files must be keyed and have the
    same definition. This allows a merging to occur for unique keys.
    By default, PROCESS(*CHK) is used to check what the results would
    be. An optional listing of the matched and unmatched records may
    be specified.

CPYUSRPRF

    Copy User Profile. Allows a new profile to be created based on an
    existing profile. The message queue, password and document
    password parameters are defaulted. The text parameter is specified
    on CPYUSRPRF. Useful for creating new profiles. The system
    supported function for copying user profiles is allowed in an
    interactive mode only. CPYUSRPRF can also be used to capture the
    CRTUSRPRF command generated and send it to a second system.

CPYUSRPRF2

    The Copy User Profile 2 command is an option on the SECOFR2 menu
    to allow a user (such as an Assistant Security Officer) to create
    a new profile by copying an existing profile. The user must be
    authorized to the TAACPYUSR2 authorization list.

CPYUSRPRF3

    The Copy User Profile 3 command assists in duplicating a user
    profile from one system to another. The DSPUSRPRF OUTFILE function
    must be used to capture the information from one or more profiles
    on the source system. The outfile must then be transferred to a
    target system. The CPYUSRPRF3 command may then be used to create a
    new profile based on the existing information.

CPYUSRSPC

    The Copy User Space command copies the contents of one user space
    to another. An option exists to control the result if different
    length user spaces exist. By default, the user spaces must have
    the same internal length.

CPYWTHDLT

    The Copy with Deleted Records command provides a simple front end
    to CPYF when a copy which includes the deleted records of the From
    File is needed. Options for the beginning and ending relative
    record numbers are provided. The command may be useful when
    working with or testing applications that use relative record
    numbers.

CRTALLPRX

    The Create All Proxy command checks for or re-creates commands as
    a proxy type that have the same name as a command in either QSYS
    or TAATOOL. Normal user commands are bypassed. Using proxy
    commands is safer for growth and should be used rather than
    duplicating a command object.

CRTBNDCL2

    The Create Bound CL Program 2 command combines the functions of
    CRTCLMOD and CRTPGM and changes the defaults of certain
    parameters. The intent is to have a simple create command for
    single module programs that replaces CRTBNDCL.

CRTBNDRPG2

    The Create Bound RPG Program 2 command combines the functions of
    CRTRPGMOD and CRTPGM and changes the defaults of certain
    parameters. The intent is to have a simple create command for
    single module programs that replaces CRTBNDRPG.

CRTCLPCALL

    The Create CLP Call Parameters command creates the CALL and DCL
    statements for a CLP source member using the entry parameter list
    from a program (CLP, RPG, or single module RPGLE/CLLE). After
    ensuring a CL source member exists, CRTCLPCALL may be used to add
    records for the CALL and DCL statements. This simplifies building
    the proper interface between a CL program and the program to be
    called.

CRTCLPDCL

    The Create CLP DCL command creates CLP DCL statements based on the
    field definitions of an externally described data base file. The
    DCL statements are added to the end of an existing source member.
    The statements can then be moved by a source editor to the DCL
    section of the source. CRTCLPDCL may be useful when dealing with
    an external definition of a data base file or a data area.

CRTCLPENT

    The Create CLP Entry Parameters command creates the PGM and DCL
    statements for a CLP source member using the call and parameter
    list from a program (CLP, RPG, or single module RPGLE/CLLE) or
    from the keywords of a command. After adding a CL source member,
    CRTCLPENT may be used to add records for the PGM and DCL
    statements. This simplifies building the proper interface between
    a program or command which invokes a CL program.

CRTCLPEXT

    The Create CLP Extract command creates CLP source for use in
    extracting data from a record buffer to variables declared from a
    data base file format. The CRTCLPDCL command may be used to create
    the DCL commands. CRTCLPEXT simplifies the use of a RDDBR command
    from the CLPDBR tool. See also the CRTCLPINS command which
    performs the inverse function.

CRTCLPINS

    The Create CLP Insert command creates CL source for use in
    inserting data from variables declared from a data base file into
    a record buffer. The CRTCLPDCL command may be used to create the
    DCL commands. CRTCLPINS simplifies the use of an UPDDBR or WRTDBR
    command from the CLPDBR tool. See also the CRTCLPEXT command which
    performs the inverse function.

CRTCMDHLP

    Create command help. A command definition object is named along
    with a panel group source member. Base help text is created for
    the command and each of the command parameters. This eliminates
    most of the need to understand any of the UIM coding necessary to
    create command help text.

CRTDBFJRN

    The Create Data Base file with Journal Fields command allows you
    to create an externally described file that contains the standard
    journaling fields (such as the user, date, RR number) and the
    field names from a file that is being journaled. The new form of
    the command uses the DSPJRN outfile to output records to the file.
    PRTDB (simple listing of named fields) or PRTDBS (allows
    select/sort also) could be used to process the entries.

CRTDCTARA

    Create Dictionary Data Area. Provides a method of creating a data
    area in the TAADCT library where a list of dictionaries may be
    named. EDTCONARR should be used to enter the dictionary names. The
    dictionaries are intended for use with the CHKSPELL, CHKSPELL2,
    CHKRPGSPE, and CHKDDSSPE tools. A discussion of the dictionaries
    provided by the TAA Tools is also included.

CRTDUPDTAQ

    The Create Duplicate Data Queue command creates a duplicate data
    queue (the system command CRTDUPOBJ does not). Only the the
    parameters for a standard type (non-DDM) data queue are
    duplicated.

CRTDUPOBJ2

    The Create Duplicate Object 2 command is similar to the system
    CRTDUPOBJ command, but will automatically delete the same object
    name/type in the To library if it exists. The same ownership or a
    new owner may be named. This allows a refresh to occur of a subset
    or duplicate library.

CRTDUPPF

    The Create Duplicate Physical file command duplicates a physical
    file object. The intent of the command is to avoid two problems
    when attempting to duplicate a model file: 1) CRTDUPOBJ
    requires *OBJMGT authority which can be undesirable to add to an
    object for general use and 2) CPYF cannot be used to duplicate a
    file description unless a member exists. CRTDUPPF allows you to
    create a file object without a member and allow duplication.

CRTEXTPRTF

    The Create Externally Described Printer File command reads an RPG
    source member with a program described printer file and creates
    the DDS for an externally described printer file and the printer
    file. Exceptions such as duplicate output lines for the same EXCPT
    line are noted and a new format name is assigned. You must make
    changes to the RPG source as well as correct any exceptions that
    are noted.

CRTGENOBJ

    The Create Generic Objects command allows you to create a number
    of generic objects with consecutive names like ABC002, ABC003, etc
    of any object type. The first object must exist in the library
    where the duplicates will be created.

CRTGRCKEY

    Create Grace Key. Intended for situations where a temporary
    software key is needed to the TAA Productivity Tools, but the TAA
    Productivity Tools owner cannot be contacted for a temporary
    license. For example, in a disaster recovery situation, the TAA
    Productivity Tools may be temporarily needed on a system that does
    not have a valid license. The grace period will last 7 days.

CRTINZRCD

    The Create Initialized Record command creates one initialized
    record from an existing file into a new file. When using the DFT
    DDS keyword on many physical file fields, you may want to ensure
    the defaults are set correctly. CRTINZRCD creates an all default
    record to allow a review. The PRTDB2 command can be helpful in
    reviewing the values in the new file.

CRTLFSRC

    Create logical file source provides for a simple logical file to
    be created by using only a command interface. A list of key fields
    may be provided. The DDS is generated and the logical file is
    created by the command.

CRTLST

    The Create List command is intended for the case where a CL
    program wants to create a variable that can be used to simulate a
    list passed from a command. This can be used with the TAA EXTLST
    function.

CRTMIPGM

    The Create MI Program command creates a program from MI source.
    This provides a simpler interface than the QPRCRTPG API.

CRTPRTPGM

    Create Print Program. Creates a generalized print program for an
    externally described file that can be used by the PRTDBF command
    which is part of this tool. PRTDBF is useful for debugging,
    problem determination, small simple listings, and working with
    OPNQRYF. It uses the field names as column headings and supports
    simple listing options of control breaks, left to right field
    ordering, editing of decimal fields and adding of numeric fields.

CRTRPGCALL

    The Create RPG Call Parameters command creates the CALL and PARM
    statements for an RPG or RPGLE source member using the entry
    parameter list from a program (CLP, RPG, or a single module
    RPGLE/CLLE). After ensuring an RPG source member exists,
    CRTRPGCALL may be used to add records for the CALL and PARM
    statements. This simplifies building the proper interface between
    an RPG program and the program to be called.

CRTRPGENT

    The Create RPG Entry Parameters command creates the *ENTRY PLIST
    and PARM statements for an RPG or RPGLE source member. The
    information is extracted from a CALL and parameter list from a
    program (CLP, RPG, or single module RPGLE/CLLE) or from the
    keywords of a command. After adding an RPG source member,
    CRTRPGENT may be used to add records for the *ENTRY PLIST and PARM
    statements.

CRTRTVDCL

    The Create Retrieve DCLs command creates DCL commands in a CLP
    source member for a named RTV command. Rather than keying the DCLs
    manually, CRTRTVDCL may be used to generate all the DCLs for a
    retrieve command that allows return variables. The source member
    must exist.

CRTSFLPGM

    The Create Subfile Program command creates a file maintenance
    program which uses a subfile. A keyed file must be specified.
    Simple validity checking, lower case, and edit codes may be
    specified. Both display file and RPG program source are generated
    and then the objects are created. You may need to modify the code
    to provide for such things as advanced validity checking.

CRTSFLPGM2

    The Create Subfile Program 2 command creates a display file and
    program (RPG or RPGLE) which allows a display of data from arrays.
    A 'position to' function is optional. It is expected that you will
    make modifications to the program to build your own array, detail
    display, etc.

CRTSRCFLST

    The Create Source File List command creates a data area intended
    to contain your standard source file names for processing by
    different TAA Tools. Rather than processing all source files in a
    library, you can use a specified subset list. After creating the
    data area, use the TAA command EDTCONARR to enter a list of your
    standard source files. Three different data areas can be defined.

CRTSTDSRCF

    The Create Standard Source Files command creates standard source
    files such as QCLSRC in a specified library. This simplifies
    creating a new library for programmer use. The files created and
    the assigned source lengths may be specified in a Constant Array.

CRTTAAPRX

    The Create TAA Proxy Command command should be used when a TAA
    command needs to be duplicated to a user library. A proxy command
    uses the command version in TAATOOL. This allows one set of
    authorizations to exist and prevents errors caused by typical
    changes to a TAA command in a future TAA version.

CRTTAASRCF

    Create TAA Source Files. The command creates the standard TAA
    source files (QATTxxx) in a specified library. This is useful when
    you want to change a tool. See the discussion for CRTTAASRCF.

CRTTAATOOL

    Create TAA Tool. Creates a specific TAA tool. Since object is now
    shipped, the only purpose of CRTTAATOOL is for re-creation of a
    tool if modifications are needed. See the HELPTAA menu discussion
    of "Modifying a tool".

CRTTGTRLS

    The Create Target Release command assists in creating or changing
    objects to be saved for a named release. A specific or generic
    object is named or all objects in a library. Either a new library
    must be named and must not exist (it is created by CRTTGTRLS) or
    the objects in the same library will be created for the named
    release. The TAA Tool RPLOBJ is used to recreate program and
    module objects and produces a listing of the results.

CRTTSTDTA

    The Create Test Data command either adds new test data records to
    an existing member or updates existing records. A prompt appears
    with the fields from the file and various options may be selected
    such as consecutive numbers, random numbers, unique numbers,
    constants, character data, or digit data. Fields not specified are
    added as blanks or zeros or not changed during an update.

CRTTSTJRN

    The Create Test Journal command is designed for writing or setting
    up test cases involving journaling. A journal receiver
    (TSTRCV0001) and journal (TSTJRN) are created in a named library.
    You may optionally start physical file journaling and access path
    journaling to all files in the library. The companion command is
    DLTTSTJRN.

CRTUSRIDX

    The Create User Index command creates a user index (*USRIDX)
    object. Only a fixed length keyed user index may be created. The
    length of an index entry may be from 1 to 2000 bytes. The user
    index may be used by other TAA tools or system functions.

CRTUSRSPC

    Create User Space. Provides a command interface for the API
    program of QUSCRTUS. Useful if the create function can be done in
    CL rather than in a call from a HLL.

CRTVTP

    The Create Virtual Tape tool provides a simple interface for
    creating, displaying, and deleting a virtual tape structure. The
    intent of the CRTVTP tool is that you would create or replace a
    virtual tape structure each time you need to use a virtual tape
    function and replace or delete it after the tape media is written.

CRTXREFLF

    The Create QADBXREF logical file program creates a logical file in
    QTEMP over the system QADBXREF file. The system QADBXREF file is
    very complex and cannot be read by OPM programs. Using the file in
    an ILE program is not easy either. By calling the TAADBINC
    supplied program, a LF is created in QTEMP that can be used to
    read the basic fields in the QADBXREF file.

CVTACTPRFL

    The Convert Active Profile List command builds an outfile of the
    user profiles displayed by the DSPACTPRFL command. DSPACTPRFL
    lists the profiles which will not be disabled by the system
    ANZACTPRF function. CHGACTPRFL is used to maintain the list.
    CHGUSRPRF may still be used to disable such a profile. The outfile
    is named ACTPRFP. The model file is TAASEHSP with a format name of
    ACTPRFLR.

CVTALLDBD

    The Convert All Data Base Dependencies command finds all files on
    the system or all files in all user libraries for the situation
    where the -Based on- physical file is in a library other than the
    dependent file. An outfile ALLDBDP is created containing one
    record for each dependent file that is in a different library.

CVTALLGRPP

    The Convert All Group Profiles command builds a keyed data base
    file with one record for each combination of user profile and
    group profile. Supplemental groups are considered. The GRPPRFP
    file is output. You must have *ALLOBJ special authority to use
    CVTALLGRPP.

CVTALLJOBQ

    Convert All JOBQs. Converts the WRKJOBQ JOBQ(*ALL) listing to a
    data base file. Release dependent function. Useful for determining
    the job queues that have pending jobs.

CVTALLOUTQ

    Convert All OUTQs. Converts the WRKOUTQ OUTQ(*ALL) listing to a
    data base file. Release dependent function. Useful for determining
    the output queues that have spooled files.

CVTALLSPCA

    The Convert All Special Authorities command creates an outfile of
    all special authorities for one or more users. By default,
    multiple records are written for each user profile: one record for
    the user, one for his group profile (if any), one for each
    supplementary group (if any), and a summary record combining all
    special authority information.

CVTARPTBL

    The Convert ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Table command
    creates an outfile of ARP table information for a specified line
    description. Address Resolution Protocol allows physically
    distinct networks to appear as if they were a single, logical
    network. The QtocLstPhyIfsARPTbl API is used. The outfile name is
    ARPTBLP. The model file is TAATCPKP with a format name of ARPTBLR.

CVTASPA

    The Convert ASP Attributes command builds an outfile of one or all
    ASPs (Auxiliary Storage Pools). The outfile created is named ASPP.
    The outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as the overflow recovery policy.

CVTAUDJRNE

    The Convert Audit Journal Entries command converts specific audit
    entries from the QAUDJRN journal to an outfile. The format of the
    outfile is determined by the entry type using system supplied
    model files. The intent of CVTAUDJRNE is to simplify the process
    of creating an outfile that can be used to write a query against
    audit entries.

CVTAUDLOG3

    The Convert Audit Log 3 command is designed to convert the Audit
    Log entries as they are written to the Audit journal in a
    continuous operation. The command should be submitted to batch,
    but remains active and acts like an interactive job. A delay time
    parameter exists to provide for a periodic wakeup of the function.
    CVTAUDLOG3 is an alternate conversion method instead of the
    CVTAUDLOG command which is part of the AUDLOG tool.

CVTAUTL

    The Convert Authorization List to Outfile command converts
    individual authorities for one, generic, or all authorization
    lists to an outfile. This allows various processing or queries
    against the information. The outfile is always AUTLP which uses a
    model file named QAOBJAUT and a format name of QSYDSAUT.

CVTAUTLOBJ

    The Convert Authorization List Objects command converts
    information about library objects, IFS objects, and or *DLS
    objects for one or more Authorization Lists to an outfile. Each
    object is represented by one record which includes the full path
    name. Library objects are also described with their library names.

CVTBINDEC

    The Convert Binary to Decimal command exists to allow for
    compatibility with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no
    longer needed because CL supports the %BIN function.

CVTBIN4DEC

    The Convert Binary 4 to Decimal command exists to allow for
    compatibility with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no
    longer needed because CL supports the %BIN function.

CVTBIN8

    The Convert Binary 8 command allows conversion of an 8 byte
    character input field (containing a binary value) to a 20 byte
    character return variable. This allows for conversion of large
    binary values. Most HLLs allow only for 2 or 4 byte binary values.
    Only positive values are returned.

CVTBITBYT

    The Convert Bits to Byte command converts 8 one byte values ('0'
    or '1') to a single byte. The command is useful if you need to
    generate a byte with meaningful codes that are made up of bit
    settings.

CVTBYTBIT

    Convert Byte to Bits. Converts a one byte value to 8 different
    return variables which will contain a value of 0 or 1. Useful when
    dealing with a character value made up of different bit settings.

CVTCFGSTS

    Convert Configuration Status. Converts the WRKCFGSTS command to a
    data base file. Release dependent function.

CVTCHRDEC

    The Convert Character to Decimal command converts a character
    field to a decimal value and allows for editing and validity
    checking options. The command is similar to CHGVAR, but provides
    for options to simplify CL program coding. CPF9898 is sent as an
    escape message on any invalid data.

CVTCLPCMD

    The Convert CLP Command command converts CL commands from CL type
    source to an outfile. One record would be written for each command
    with the identifying information such as member name, sequence
    number, and last change date. Some commands such as SBMJOB or IF
    which contain a sub command will also cause a record to be written
    which is identified as a sub command.

CVTCLSA

    The Convert Class Attributes command builds an outfile of one or
    more Class objects. The outfile created is named CLSP. The outfile
    may then be queried for consistency or searching for specific
    values such as those Class objects containing a certain run
    priority.

CVTCMDA

    The Convert Command Attributes command builds an outfile of one or
    more Command objects. The outfile created is named CMDP. The
    outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those Command objects containing a prompt
    override program.

CVTCMDKWD

    Convert Command Keywords. Provides a method of obtaining a data
    base file of command and keyword combinations from the commands
    found in a library. One record is output for each combination of
    command and keyword. Allows several functions to occur when you
    need to know the existing keywords being used.

CVTCMDUSG

    The Convert Command Usage command converts the spooled output from
    PRTCMDUSG to an outfile. This allows you to process all program
    names that use a specific command. Only a single command may be
    specified. The outfile is named CMDUSGP and may exist in any
    library.

CVTCTLASC

    The Convert Controller Description ASYNC command converts one,
    generic, or all ASYNC controller descriptions to an outfile. This
    provides a simple method of processing the information. The
    outfile name is always CTLASCP. The model file is TAACFGVP with a
    format name of CTLASCR.

CVTCTLHOST

    The Convert Controller Description Host command converts one,
    generic, or all Host controller descriptions to an outfile. This
    provides a simple method of processing the information. The
    outfile name is always CTLHOSTP. The model file is TAACFGYP with a
    format name of CTLHOSTR.

CVTCTLLWS

    The Convert Controller Description Local Workstation command
    converts one, generic, or all local workstation controller
    descriptions to an outfile. This provides a simple method of
    processing the information. The outfile name is always CTLLWSP.
    The model file is TAACFGWP with a format name of CTLLWSR.

CVTCTLNET

    The Convert Controller Description Network command converts one,
    generic, or all network controller descriptions to an outfile.
    This provides a simple method of processing the information. The
    outfile name is always CTLNETP. The model file is TAACFGXP with a
    format name of CTLNETR.

CVTCTLVWS

    The Convert Controller Description Virtual Workstation command
    converts one, generic, or all virtual workstation controller
    descriptions to an outfile. This provides a simple method of
    processing the information. The outfile name is always CTLVWSP.
    The model file is TAACFGZP with a format name of CTLVWSR.

CVTDAT

    Convert Date. Provides a HLL CALL interface to the i5/OS provided
    CVTDAT command.

CVTDAT13

    The Convert Date 13 command converts the 13 character date
    retrieved by many system commands in the format CYYMMDDHHMMSS and
    returns date and time values ready for printing. The date is
    returned in job format with the job date separator used. The time
    is returned with the job time separator used.

CVTDAT2

    The Convert Date 2 command is similar to the system CVTDAT
    command, but supports a wider range of dates. The system command
    is limited to dates of 1940 to 2039 or 1928 to 2071 depending on
    the formats. The CVTDAT2 command has a range of years from 1600 to
    4000. All of the date formats supported by CVTDAT are available on
    CVTDAT2.

CVTDAYN

    Convert Day N. Allows a simple command prompt for those cases
    where the end user must key in a date in the future that is
    normally thought of as N days from today. The end user keys a date
    or special values *DAY1, *DAY2 ... *DAY60 and an actual date is
    returned. Useful for scheduling functions or expiration dates.

CVTDAYS

    The Convert Days command converts a range of dates to an outfile.
    The BUSCAL tool must first be used to a build a Business Calendar
    (a *USRSPC object) with the years that you want to consider. Days
    such as Sunday, New Years, Christmas, and specific dates may be
    excluded. CVTDAYS is then used to build an outfile of dates that
    have not been excluded.

CVTDBFFMT

    Convert Data Base File Format. Used for conversion from one file
    to another when the formats differ and CPYF cannot be used. For
    example, CVTDBFFMT will allow the conversion from character to
    decimal or vice versa and allows date formats such as MMDDYY to be
    converted to a different format such as CYYMMDD or YYYYMMDD. Can
    be useful when changing date formats to allow for the 21st
    century.

CVTDDSSRC

    Convert DDS Source. Converts DDS source from the S/38 environment
    syntax to the i5/OS environment syntax. Some restrictions exist.
    Useful for converting to the i5/OS environment.

CVTDECBIN

    The Convert Decimal to Binary command exists to allow for
    compatibility with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no
    longer needed because CL supports the %BIN function.

CVTDECBIN4

    The Convert Decimal to Binary 4 command exists to allow for
    compatibility with an old version in QUSRTOOL. The function is no
    longer needed because CL supports the %BIN function.

CVTDEVDSP

    The Convert Device Display command creates an outfile of one,
    generic, or all display devices. The outfile created is named
    DEVDSPP. The information in the outfile is taken from the device
    description for each device.

CVTDEVPRT

    The Convert Device Printer command creates an outfile of one,
    generic, or all printer devices. The outfile created is named
    DEVPRTP. The information in the outfile is taken from the device
    description for each device.

CVTDISTANC

    The Convert Distance command allows a conversion from one type of
    value such as meters to a different type such as miles. The input
    value may be up to 9 digits with 2 decimals. The output value may
    be any of 15/0, 15/2, or 15/5. Conversions can be made for
    millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards,
    miles, cable lengths, fathoms, and furlongs.

CVTDLTSPC

    The Convert Deleted Space command converts member information from
    one or more files to an outfile. It is intended to be used for
    queries regarding members with deleted record space. If variable
    length fields exist, the allocated length is output in addition to
    the maximum record length. A 'minimum' amount of total deleted
    space is included. An omit list of libraries may also be
    specified.

CVTDSKSTS

    The Convert WRKDSKSTS command converts the information displayed
    by WRKDSKSTS and creates a data base file DSKSTSP with one record
    per disk unit. This allows you to program the information that is
    on the WRKDSKSTS display. The QYASPOL API is used.

CVTDSPDTA

    Convert Display Data. When data is sent to a display, care must be
    taken to not send display control characters. When dealing with
    packed or hex data, errors can occur if the data is sent to the
    display. The CVTDSPDTA command converts the data so that it will
    contain only displayable characters.

CVTDSPTAP

    Convert DSPTAP Labels. Converts the DSPTAP listing to a data base
    file. Release dependent function. Useful for automating functions
    where the information about the labels is needed in a program.

CVTDTAARA

    The Convert Data Area command converts the attributes and the data
    from one or more data areas to the outfile DTAARAV. Both *DEC
    and *CHAR data areas are supported. The outfile may then be
    queried for consistency or searching for specific values.

CVTDTAARAA

    The Convert Data Area Attributes command builds an outfile of one
    or more Data Area objects. The outfile created is named DTAARAP.
    The outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those Data Area objects containing decimal
    values.

CVTDTAQ

    The Convert Data Queue command converts the entries from a keyed
    or non-keyed TYPE(*STD) data queue to an outfile named DTAQP. One
    record is written for each entry. The size of the entry field in
    the outfile is limited to 9,000 bytes. Data is truncated if it
    exceeds this amount.

CVTDTAQA

    The Convert Data Queue Attributes command builds an outfile of one
    or more Data Queue objects. The outfile created is named DTAQP.
    The outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those Data Queue objects with keyed
    sequence.

CVTDTS

    The Convert DTS command converts the internal format for date/time
    known as *DTS into CYYMMDD and HHMMSS return values. The *DTS
    format appears in various places such as in message data and API
    formats. A CVTTODTS command is also provided. The QWCCVTDT API is
    used.

CVTEDTD

    The Convert Edit Descriptions command converts the Edit
    Descriptions (5-9) to a data base file. This can be used to allow
    the Edit Descriptions to be transported to another system and
    entered using the RPLEDTD tool. All Edit Descriptions are output
    by CVTEDTD. RPLEDTD allows replacing one or all.

CVTFD

    The Convert File Description command is similar to the system
    DSPFD command, but only creates an outfile (does not print or
    display). In addition to the base functions of DSPFD, CVTFD also
    provides for IASP support. Selection can be made by type of
    library and a omit list of libraries may be specified.

CVTFMT

    The Convert Format tool creates an outfile of the formats for a
    specified file, generic files, or all files in a library. One
    record per format is output. The API QUSLRCD is used.

CVTFRMHEX

    Convert From Hex. Converts from a 2 byte hex value (e.g. F0) to a
    one byte value. Up to 256 characters can be converted to a 128
    byte return variable. Useful for conversion work.

CVTFRMOUTQ

    The Convert From Output Queue command converts all the spooled
    files in a named output queue to a named data base file in a
    library. The companion command is CVTTOOUTQ to convert from a data
    base file to spooled files. Spool APIs are used so there are no
    restrictions on the the type of data or attributes that can be
    converted.

CVTFRMSPLF

    The Convert From Spooled File tool supports both the CVTFRMSPLF
    and CVTTOSPLF commands. CVTFRMSPLF converts a spooled file to a
    member in a data base file. Spool APIs are used so there are no
    restrictions on the the type of data or attributes that can be
    converted. CVTTOSPLF converts a member back to a spooled file.

CVTGRPPRF

    The Convert Group Profiles command creates an outfile of the
    members of a group profile. The user profile information will
    appear in the outfile if the user profile is specified as the
    value for the GRPPRF parameter or is in the list supplied for the
    SUPGRPPRF parameters. This provides a simple method of reviewing
    and processing the members of a group. The outfile name is
    GRPPRFP.

CVTHEX

    Convert to Hex. Converts a value to hex. Useful for conversion to
    printed or displayed values or when working with packed keys and
    the OVRDBF POSITION parameter. Also may be used from a HLL by
    invoking the command processing routine.

CVTHEXDEC

    Convert Hex to Decimal. Allows a method of converting a hex value
    to the decimal equivalent in a CL program. Useful for working with
    Hex values.

CVTHEXOBJ

    The Convert Hex Object Type command converts the internal object
    type form in hexadecimal (such as 0201) into the external object
    type form (such as *PGM). For the inverse function, see CVTOBJTYP.
    For a work display that allows interactive conversion, see
    DSPHEXOBJ.

CVTIFS

    The Convert IFS command converts directory entry attribute
    information from the IFS and outputs the information to a data
    base file named IFSDIRP. The file can then be processed by other
    TAA Tools (such as DSPIFS or WRKIFS) or user written programs to
    extract desired information.

CVTIFSAUT

    The Convert IFS Authority command converts the authorities of one
    or more IFS objects to an outfile. One record is output for each
    user authorized to an object. The command is helpful in building a
    file that can be analyzed.

CVTIFSAUT2

    The Convert IFS Authority 2 command converts IFS authorities for a
    single user to an outfile named IFSAUT2P. This allows simplified
    processing of user authorities. The model file is TAAIFTWP with a
    format name of IFSAUT2PR.

CVTIFSDAUT

    The Convert IFS Data Authority command converts the output of the
    RTVIFSEAUT or CVTIFSEAUT commands individual fields to the
    description for data authorities that is seen using WRKLNK (option
    9 for Work with Authorities). For example, if Read and Execute are
    the only individual data authorities that are specified, *RX would
    be returned.

CVTIFSEAUT

    The Convert IFS entry authority command converts detail authority
    information of a single IFS object to a data base file named
    IFSEAUTP. The file can then be processed by user written programs
    to extract desired information. See the CVTIFSAUT command for
    converting authorities for more than a single object.

CVTIFSOWN

    The Convert IFS Owner command builds an outfile of the owned
    objects in the IFS (does not include objects in libraries). The
    system DSPUSRPRF OUTFILE function does not output this
    information. The QSYLOBJA API is used to extract the information.
    The outfile is named IFSOWNP and is placed in a specified library.
    The model file is TAAIFTP with a format name of IFSOWNR.

CVTIMGCLG

    The Convert Image Catalog command converts the image catalogs to
    the IMGCLGP outfile in a named library. The QVOIRCLG API is used
    to retrieve the entries. The model outfile is TAACLGBP with a
    format name of IMGCLGR.

CVTIMGCLGE

    The Convert Image Catalog Entries command converts the entries for
    a specific Virtual Tape image catalog to the IMGCLGEP outfile in a
    named library. The QVOIRCLD API is used to retrieve the entries.
    The model outfile is TAACLGAP with a format name of IMGCLGER. See
    the CVTIMGCLG2 command for converting an Optical Image Catalog.

CVTIMGCLG2

    The Convert Image Catalog 2 command converts the image catalog
    entries for an Optical image catalog to a data base file. The
    output file is always IMGCLGDP with a model file named TAACLGDP
    and a format name IMGCLGE2.

CVTIPADR

    The Convert IP Address command checks an Internet Address for a
    valid format. TAA9892 is sent if the address is not in the correct
    format. If a 'generic like' IP address is entered, a low and high
    range of addresses are returned. If a 'generic like' IP address is
    not entered, a full address is returned. The intent of the command
    is to return values that can be easily processed by a program.

CVTIPDEV

    The Convert IP Device command converts the IP devices to the
    IPDEVP outfile in a named library. TCP must be active. Only
    TCP/IPv4 network interfaces are supported. One record is written
    for each IP device. The API QtocLstNetIfc is used. For a
    description of the field values in the outfile, refer to the API
    documentation for format NIFC0100.

CVTIP6DEV

    The Convert IPv6 Device command converts the IP version 6 device
    information to the IP6DEVP outfile in a named library. TCP must be
    active. Only TCP/IPv6 network interfaces are supported. One record
    is written for each IP device. The API QtocLstNetIfc is used. For
    a description of the field values in the outfile, refer to the API
    documentation for format NIFC0200.

CVTJOB

    The Convert Job to Outfile command converts the information for
    one or more jobs to an outfile. Selection may occur on the job or
    user name as well as the status (*ALL, *ACTIVE, *JOBQ, *OUTQ). The
    outfile name is JOBP which uses the model file TAAJOFKP and a
    format name of JOBRCD.

CVTJOBACG3

    The Convert Job Accounting 3 command is designed to convert the
    job accounting and/or the print accounting entries as they are
    written to the job accounting journal. The command should be
    submitted to batch, but remains active and acts like an
    interactive job. A delay time parameter exists to provide for a
    periodic wakeup of the function. CVTJOBACG3 is an alternate
    conversion method instead of CVTJOBACG or CVTPRTACG.

CVTJOBD

    The Convert Job Description command builds an outfile of one or
    more Job Descriptions. The outfile created is named JOBDP. The
    outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those job descriptions containing a
    certain job queue.

CVTJOBLCK

    The Convert Job Locks command converts the locks for a specific
    job to an outfile. The file can then be processed for a variety of
    needs. The name of the output file is JOBLCKP. The model file is
    TAAJOEDP with a format name of JOBLCKR.

CVTJOBLOG

    The Convert Job Log command converts a job log to an outfile. The
    system DSPJOBLOG command provides a similar function, but is
    limited to operating on the current job and produces an outfile
    with variable length fields. CVTJOBLOG works on any job log and
    produces a file that can be read by a normal RPG program.

CVTJOBLOG2

    The Convert Job Log 2 command creates an outfile of one record per
    batch job that was submitted and has completed. Selection on the
    completion code (defaults to abnormal job end) may be specified.
    The command is a slow runner, but the outfile can be used to help
    understand the failures that have occurred. The command is English
    language dependent.

CVTJOBPERF

    The Convert Job Performance command converts job performance
    information for specified active jobs to an outfile. A reset
    capability exists. This provides a simple summary of such things
    as CPU seconds used, the percentage of CPU seconds used,
    transaction count, and response time. The model file is TAAJOFDP
    with a format name of JOBPERFR.

CVTJOBQ

    The Convert Job Queue command uses a system API to access the
    information similar to WRKJOBQ and creates the data base file
    JOBQP with one record per job on the job queue. Useful for
    automating functions for the jobs that exist on job queues.

CVTJOBQA

    The Convert Job Queue Attributes command builds an outfile of one
    or more Job Queue objects. The outfile created is named JOBQAP.
    The outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those job queue objects containing jobs.

CVTJOBSCDE

    The Convert Job Schedule Entries command converts the job schedule
    entries to the JOBSCDP outfile. A specific job name, a generic job
    name, or all job names may be converted. The data may then be
    processed as a normal data base file. For example, the file may be
    saved and restored to another system where the entries could be
    added by the ADDJOBSCD2 TAA Tool command.

CVTJOBSPLF

    The Convert Job Spooled Files command converts existing spooled
    files for a specified job to an outfile. The WRKSPLFP data base
    file is written with one record for each spooled file. This is the
    same format as used by CVTWRKSPLF. CVTJOBSPLF provides a
    performance advantage over CVTWRKSPLF when the spooled files for a
    specific job are needed.

CVTJRNA

    Convert Journal Attributes. Converts the journal environment (i.e.
    what files and access paths are being journaled), for a named
    journal to data base files (separate files for physicals being
    journaled, access path journaling and the receivers). Allows the
    current journal environment to be saved with the files that are
    being journaled. The companion command, RSMJRN restarts the
    journal environment.

CVTJRNDBF

    The Convert Journaled Data Base Files command converts the
    physical files that are being journaled to a specific journal to
    an outfile (CVTJRNP) in a specific library). Each data base record
    contains the name and library of the file being journaled. Other
    tools such as RTVPFJRNA may be used to retrieve the journal
    attributes of a specific file. A Journal API is used internally to
    access the journaled files.

CVTJRNOBJ

    The Convert Journal Objects command converts the objects that are
    being journaled from a specified journal to an outfile. Different
    object types are handled including IFS objects. The outfile is
    always CVTJRNP which uses the model file TAAJROTP and a format
    name of JRNOBJR.

CVTJRNRCVA

    Convert Journal Receiver Attributes. The command takes the spooled
    output from DSPJRNRCVA and converts the information to a data base
    file. Useful for accessing how many entries exist in the journal
    receivers.

CVTJRNRCVD

    The Convert Journal Receiver Directory command creates an outfile
    with one record per journal receiver for a specific journal. The
    API QjoRetrieveJournalInformation is used. The outfile is always
    JRNFILP with a format name of JRNRCVR. This is the same outfile as
    was used by CVTJRNA.

CVTLFMD

    The Convert Logical File Member Description command converts
    member information from one or more logical files to an outfile
    named LFMBRP in a named library. For each member of a logical
    file, one record is output for each 'based on' physical file. The
    file can then be analyzed by various functions.

CVTLIBA

    The Convert Library Attributes command builds an outfile of one or
    more Library objects. The outfile created is named LIBP. The
    outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as those Library objects that are specified
    as TEST types.

CVTLIBAUT

    The Convert Library Authority command converts the object
    authority information of one, all or generic objects within a
    library and the library object to an outfile. The system command
    DSPOBJAUT operates on only a single object. The outfile name is
    OBJAUTP. The model file is QAOBJAUT in QSYS with a format name of
    QSYDSAUT.

CVTLIBAUT2

    The Convert Library Authority 2 command converts the authorities
    of users to library objects (not the objects within a library) to
    an outfile. The DSPOBJAUT command operates on only a single
    object. The outfile name is OBJAUTP. The model file is QAOBJAUT in
    QSYS with a format name of QSYDSAUT.

CVTLIBCNT

    The Convert Library Count command adds one record to the LIBCNTP
    outfile which is a summary of the objects in a single library. A
    list of up to 300 libraries may be named or the special
    values *ALL or *NONSYS. The output record includes counts and
    sizes of typical object types as well as an estimate of the number
    of internal objects that will be required for a save.

CVTLIBDBF

    Convert library data base files creates an outfile of the files
    that exist in a library. Options exist to specify the type of file
    (*PF or *LF) or *DTA or *SRC. For example, the command is useful
    when you have CL programs that only want to operate on source
    files in a library. Uses the system file QADBXREF.

CVTLIBLCK

    The Convert Library Locks command converts any locks held on a
    library and any objects within the library. This allows a
    determination of whether any locks exist before a function that
    requires exclusive use of the library. The model file in TAATOOL
    is TAAOBJDP with a format name of OBJLCKR.

CVTLIBLCK2

    The Convert Library Locks 2 command converts any locks held on one
    or more object types. This allows a determination of who has the
    library on their library list or has made an explicit allocation
    of a library. The model file in TAATOOL is TAAOBJDP with a format
    name of OBJLCKR.

CVTLIBOBJA

    The Convert Library Object Authorities command builds an outfile
    of all the authorizations to objects in one or more libraries. The
    outfile may then be used for a function such as the CMPLIBOBJA or
    the CHGLIBOBJA TAA Tools.

CVTLIBOBJD

    The Convert Library Object Description command builds the LIBOBJP
    data base file of selected libraries (one record per library). You
    may specify a list of libraries (including generic names), or use
    the special values *LIBL, *USRLIBL, *CURLIB, *ALL, *IBM,
    or *ALLUSR. An omit list may also be specified.

CVTLINASC

    The Convert Line Description ASYNC command converts one, generic,
    or all ASYNC line descriptions to an outfile. This provides a
    simple method of processing the information. The outfile name is
    always LINASCP. The model file is TAACFGUP with a format name of
    LINASCR.

CVTLINETH

    The Convert Line Description Ethernet command converts one,
    generic, or all Ethernet line descriptions to an outfile. This
    provides a simple method of processing the information. The
    outfile name is always LINETHP. The model file is TAACFGPP with a
    format name of LINETHR.

CVTLINPPP

    The Convert Line Description PPP (Point to Point Protocol) command
    converts one, generic, or all PPP line descriptions to an outfile.
    This provides a simple method of processing the information. The
    outfile name is always LINPPPP. The model file is TAACFGRP with a
    format name of LINPPPR.

CVTLINSDLC

    The Convert Line Description SDLC command converts one, generic,
    or all SDLC line descriptions to an outfile. This provides a
    simple method of processing the information. The outfile name is
    always LINSDLP. The model file is TAACFGQP with a format name of
    LINSDLR.

CVTMBRD

    The Convert Member Description command creates an outfile of DSPFD
    TYPE(*MBR) information. Rather than using the DSPFD command
    directly, CVTMBRD offers more selection capability in terms of
    generic names, data or source, and an omit library function.

CVTMBRLST

    The Convert Member List command converts a list of members to an
    outfile using an API to access the members. The outfile format is
    the same as DSPFD *MBRLIST (QAFDMBRL with a format of QWHFDML),
    but the CVTMBRLST command allows a member name parameter and a
    source type parameter. Generic member names may be specified. This
    allows for faster creation of member lists.

CVTMBRLST2

    The Convert Member List 2 command converts the member description
    information for one, generic, or all members of a file. The output
    file is the same as that used by DSPFD *MBRLIST. The DSPFD command
    does not allow a single or generic member name. CVTMBRLST2 makes
    it simple to create a function that processes one, generic, or all
    members from a file.

CVTMNUA

    The Convert Menu Attributes command builds an outfile of one or
    more Menu objects. The outfile created is named MNUP. The outfile
    may then be queried for consistency or searching for specific
    values such as the programs that are used for menus.

CVTMODINF

    The Convert Module Information command converts the module
    information for ILE *PGM objects and *SRVPGM objects. The
    information is accessed from *PGM or *SRVPGM objects as opposed
    to *MODULE objects. An outfile is created with one record per
    module with descriptive fields for the object as well as the
    module (such as the source file and type used to create the
    module).

CVTMONEY

    The Convert Money tool allows a CL program to calculate such
    functions as how much money is owed each month on a typical
    mortgage calculation. Several commands are provided.

CVTMSGF

    Convert Message File. The command takes the spooled output from
    DSPMSGD and converts most of the individual message information to
    a data base file. Release dependent function.

CVTMSGFA

    The Convert Message File Attributes command builds an outfile of
    one or more Message File objects. The outfile created is named
    MSGFAP. The outfile may then be queried for consistency or
    searching for specific values such as those Message File objects
    containing a certain CCSID.

CVTMSGQ

    The Convert Message Queue command converts the messages found in
    an external message queue (such as QSYSOPR) to an outfile.
    Selection criteria allows different types of messages to be
    converted as well as a start date and time. The API QMHLSTM is
    used to access the messages.

CVTMSGQA

    The Convert Message Queue Attributes command builds an outfile of
    one or more Message Queue objects. The outfile created is named
    MSGQP. The outfile may then be queried for consistency or
    searching for specific values such as those Message Queue objects
    containing messages.

CVTMSGQ2

    The Convert Message Queue 2 command converts the messages found in
    an external message queue (such as QSYSOPR) to an outfile. This
    differs from the CVTMSGQ tool in that the open list QGYOLMSG API
    is used to allow a very large number of messages to be converted.
    Selection criteria allows different types of messages to be
    converted as well as a start date and time.

CVTNETA

    The Convert Network Attributes command converts the network
    attributes to an outfile. NETATRP is the name of the outfile in
    the library you specify. One record with unique fields for each of
    the network attributes is written to the file. This allows a
    comparison to be made with other uses of CVTNETA at different
    dates. See the CMPNETA command.

CVTNETSTAT

    The Convert Network Statistics tool allows the conversion of TCP
    network statistics to outfiles. Options on the CVTNETSTAT command
    allow conversion of TCP/IP 1) Interface status, 2) Route
    information, and 3) Connection status. Each of the sub functions
    is a separate command. System APIs are used to access the data.

CVTOBJAUT

    The Convert Object Authority command creates an outfile of
    authorities for one or more objects in a library. The model file
    is QAOBJAUT (same as used by DSPOBJAUT). The outfile is always
    OBJAUTP with a format name of QSYDSAUT. The system command
    DSPOBJAUT allows output for a single object.

CVTOBJAUTD

    The Convert Object Authority Description command converts
    individual authorities to an authority description
    of *ALL, *USE, *CHANGE, 'USER DEF', or *EXCLUDE. This can be
    helpful when dealing with an outfile such as that used by
    DSPUSRPRF TYPE(*OBJAUT).

CVTOBJD

    The Convert Object Description command is similar to the DSPOBJD
    function of creating an outfile. Unlike DSPOBJD, an object name
    such as '*XYZ*' may be specified to output a record for any
    objects containing 'XYZ' within the name field. Selection by
    object attribute (eg PF) or owner may also be made.

CVTOBJDAT

    The Convert Object Description Date command is intended for
    converting the MMDDYY format used in the date fields of the
    DSPOBJD outfile. The date is returned in the CYYMMDD format. The
    CPP may be called directly.

CVTOBJD2

    The Convert Object Description 2 command creates the OBJDSCP
    outfile of objects similar to DSPOBJD. However, the output records
    contain only the object, library, and object type. The advantage
    of this approach is that the system does not have to determine the
    size of the objects. If a file has many members, the basic
    information can be retrieved quickly.

CVTOBJD3

    The Convert Object Description 3 command converts DSPOBJD
    information to a subset outfile using the same field names (such
    as ODOBNM for object name). Not all fields from the system file
    are included. The command is intended for the case where the
    program is created to run on a prior release where the DSPOBJD
    model file may differ and cause a file override error in a
    program. A list of object attributes may be specified.

CVTOBJD4

    The Convert Object Description 4 command creates an outfile of
    object descriptions based on the DSPOBJD V5R3 outfile format. This
    allows a program which uses the outfile that is created on a more
    current release to be transferred to a prior release and operate
    successfully. The V5R3 format is created using the QUSLOBJ API and
    has a format name of QLIDOBJD.

CVTOBJD5

    The Convert Object Description 5 command provides an outfile for
    most of the fields created by DSPOBJD and adds large fields for
    the object and save size values to allow for 15 and 20 digit
    fields. Edited values are also provided as separate fields. This
    provides a simple means of working with large sizes. The model
    file is TAAOBLZP with a format name of QLIDOBJD.

CVTOBJD6

    The Convert Object Description 6 command creates the OBJDSCQ
    outfile of objects similar to DSPOBJD. However, the output records
    contain only the object, library, object type, object attribute,
    user attribute, and text description. The advantage of this
    approach is that the system does not have to determine the size of
    the objects. If a file has many members, the basic information can
    be retrieved quickly.

CVTOBJLCK

    Convert Object Locks. Converts WRKOBJLCK to a data base file. Uses
    WRKOBJLCK and CPYSPLF. Release dependent function. Useful for
    automating functions which need to know what jobs hold locks on
    objects or members.

CVTOBJTYP

    The Convert Object Type command converts from an external object
    type (such as *PGM) to an integer value and/or a 4 byte character
    value (such as '0201'). For the inverse function, see CVTHEXOBJ.
    For a work display that allows interactive conversion, see
    DSPHEXOBJ.

CVTOPNF

    The Convert Open Files command builds an outfile of the files that
    are open to a job. The outfile created is named OPNFILP. You must
    have *JOBCTL special authority to specify a job that is not being
    run under the same profile name. The QDMLOPNF API is used.

CVTOUTQ

    Convert Output Queue. Creates a data base file with one record per
    spool file in an output queue. Uses the system supported API.
    Useful for automating functions using the spooled files in an
    output queue.

CVTOUTQD

    The Convert Output Queue Description command creates an outfile of
    the descriptive information from one or more output queues. The
    outfile will contain such information as the number of writers
    assigned, the number of spooled files that exist, the connection
    type, etc. The outfile can then be read by a user program for a
    variety of needs.

CVTOUTQDTQ

    The Convert Output Queue Data Queue command converts the entries
    sent by the system to a data queue if the DTAQ parameter is
    specified on CRT/CHGOUTQ. This allows a determination of spooled
    files that were output as opposed to the print accounting function
    which captures only those files that were actually printed.

CVTPCKFLD

    The Convert Packed Field command converts a data base file
    containing packed or binary fields to a data base with zoned
    decimal fields. All character fields remain the same. The data
    from the original file is then copied using CPYF FMTOPT(*MAP). The
    new file becomes a permanent file on your system and can be used
    for converting from or to packed fields. This can be helpful when
    dealing with PCs.

CVTPGMA

    Convert Program Attributes. Creates a data base file with one
    record per program. Uses the TAA Tool RTVPGMA (which uses an API)
    to access the information for one, generic, or all programs in a
    library, or library list. Useful for automating functions using
    program attributes.

CVTPGMA2

    The Convert Program Attributes 2 command converts program object
    (*PGM) information to an outfile with one record per program. This
    includes module information for up to 100 modules which is written
    as an array. This allows simple processing of programs that are
    made up of multiple modules. The same information as available
    with CVTPGMA plus the module information is output by CVTPGMA2.

CVTPING

    The Convert Ping command captures the information from a PING
    command and places the results in one record written to an
    outfile. Each record contains the results for 5 ping attempts and
    the minimum, average, and maximum of all attempts. The outfile
    name is always PINGP. The model outfile is TAATCPM with a format
    name of PINGRCD.

CVTPRTSTS

    The Convert Printer Status command converts the status information
    for all or generic printers to an outfile. This includes the
    output queue associated with the printer and the status of both
    the writer and the output queue. The outfile is always PRTSTSP and
    the model file is TAAPRTJP. The API QGYRPRTL is used along with
    the TAA Tool RTVDEVPRT.

CVTPRXCMD

    The Convert Proxy Command command converts from a command object
    one record for each command in a proxy command chain. One record
    will always exist for the actual command in the chain with a type
    of *CMD. The QCDRCMDI API is used. The outfile is always PRXCMDP
    which uses the model file TAACMFOP with a format name of PRXCMDR.

CVTPTFGRP

    The Convert PTF Group command converts the PTF groups to an
    outfile. There is one record output for each PTF group. This is
    the same information that can be displayed with WRKPTFGRP. The API
    'QpzListPTFGroups' is used. The file name is always PTFGRPP with a
    format name of PTFGRPR.

CVTPTFGRPD

    The Convert PTF Group Details command converts the individual PTFs
    for a PTF Group or all PTF Groups to an outfile. Each record
    contains several fields describing the status of the PTF. This is
    the same information that can be displayed with WRKPTFGRP using
    Option 5. The API 'QpzListPTFGroupDetails' is used. The file name
    is always PTFGRPDP with a format name of PTFGRPR.

CVTQHST

    The Convert QHST command converts one or more QHST files to an
    externally described data base file. Allows simple processing of
    QHST information. For message data access, you must still know the
    format per message.

CVTRCDLCK

    The Convert Record Locks command converts the record locks from
    all jobs holding record locks on a specific file/member. You must
    have *JOBCTL special authority to use CVTRCDLCK. The outfile is
    always RCDLCKP with a format name of RCDLCKR. The model file
    TAADBJMP in TAATOOL is used.

CVTRCDLCK2

    The Convert Record Lock 2 command builds an outfile of the record
    locks held by a job. The outfile includes information about the
    file, library, member, relative record number, and the status of
    the lock (held or waiting). The file name created is RCDLCKP. The
    model file used is TAADBJMP with a format name of RCDLCKR.

CVTREGINF

    The Convert Registration Information command converts the data
    displayed by WRKREGINF to an outfile. One record is written for
    each exit point and program that is registered. If no programs are
    registered for an exit point, a record will will still be written
    containing the exit point information. The
    QusRetrieveExitInformation API is used to extract the information.

CVTRMTOUTQ

    The Convert Remote Output Queue command creates an outfile of the
    output queues that are specified as remote output queues. The base
    information is the same as that produced by CVTOUTQD plus the
    addition of information provided by RTVHOSTNAM. The output file
    name is RMTOUTP.

CVTRPYLE

    The Convert System Reply List command converts the System Reply
    List entries to a data base file. This can be used to allow the
    Reply List entries to be transported to another system and entered
    using the RPLRPYLE tool.

CVTSAVFD

    Convert Save File Description. The information from DSPSAVF of the
    save information for a save file is converted to a data base file.
    Useful for working with the save information in a program. This
    includes both object and member level information.

CVTSBSD

    The Convert Subsystem Description command converts the information
    about a Subsystem Description to one or more outfiles. All
    information may be converted or a specific type (such as Routing
    Entries). Each type is converted to a separate outfile.

CVTSEUTYP

    The Convert SEU type command converts an SEU type such as RPG to
    the object type *PGM (or PF to *FILE). This can be helpful when an
    end user inputs an SEU type and the object type is needed.

CVTSFWRSC

    The Convert Software Resources command provides a simpler outfile
    to work with than the system DSPSFWRSC command. Only the data that
    appears on the DSPSFWRSC OUTPUT(*PRINT) listing is converted to
    the SFWRSCP outfile. The model file is TAASYTXP with a record
    format name of SFWRSCR. Because the listing must be read by
    CPYSPLF, only the lower and upper case English language versions
    of DSPSFWRSC are supported.

CVTSPLNAPI

    The Convert Spooled File Number to API command converts a 5 byte
    character SPLNBR value (such as *LAST) to a 4 byte character
    variable containing a binary number required by the spool APIs.
    The command converts the special values *LAST or *ONLY as well as
    specific spooled file numbers. The command is useful when dealing
    with spool APIs.

CVTSPLNBR

    The Convert Spooled File Number command converts the 4 digit
    decimal value passed from a typical SPLNBR command prompt to a 5
    byte character variable for use in commands using a spooled file
    number. The return parameter will contain *ONLY, *LAST, or a
    specific 4 digit spooled file number. CVTSPLNBR is useful when
    writing a user command with a SPLNBR parameter.

CVTSRCMBR

    The Convert Source Member command converts source that exceeds 70
    columns of data to a format not exceeding 70 columns. This allows
    a tool such as EDTSRC to work with previously created DDS source
    such as CL or DDS. The type of source must be named (CL, CMD, DDS,
    or TXT). Any non supported source types are flagged.

CVTSRVPGMA

    The Convert Service Program Attributes command converts the
    attributes of *SRVPGM object types to an outfile named SRVPGMP in
    a named library. This provides a simple method of reviewing and
    processing service program objects.

CVTSVRAUTE

    The Convert Server Authentication Entries command converts the
    Authentication Entries for one or all servers to an outfile. Each
    record contains the name of the server and a user. You must
    have *ALLOBJ and *SECADM special authorities to use CVTSVRAUTE.

CVTSYSLVL

    Convert System Level. Converts the release ID information from the
    form VnnRnnMnn (e.g. retrieved by RTVOBJD) to a form that is more
    usually displayed (e.g. VnRnMn). Useful for providing displayable
    information.

CVTSYSSTS

    Convert WRKSYSSTS. Creates a data base file with one record per
    pool. Uses the API QWCRSSTS. Useful for determining what the
    attributes of a system are (such as amount of disk storage,
    percent used, and main storage pool information).

CVTSYSVAL

    The Convert System Values command converts the spooled file output
    from WRKSYSVAL to the SYSVALP file. This provides a solution for
    determining the system values that exist on each release, the text
    descriptions and the current and shipped values.

CVTTAAFMT

    The Convert TAA Format command is used to convert from a prior
    data base format to a new format for specific TAA Tools. Most
    conversions occur automatically when the TAA Productivity Tools
    are installed.

CVTTAPSAVD

    Convert Tape Save Description. The information from DSPTAP of the
    save information for a library or all libraries on a tape is
    converted to a data base file. Useful for working with the save
    information in a program. This includes both object and member
    level information. Release dependent function.

CVTTCPJOB

    The Convert TCP Jobs command gathers information on the TCP jobs
    that are connected to a specific TCP port number.

CVTTIM

    The Convert Time command ensures a time format of hhmmss or
    hh:mm:ss (using the job time separator) from a value of *CURRENT,
    another hhmmss format, or a format with valid separators such as
    hh.mm.ss. The time is also checked to ensure it is valid.

CVTTIMSEC

    The Convert Time to Seconds command converts a time value (HHMMSS)
    to a return parameter containing the number of seconds prior to
    midnight. For example, if the value is 030000 (3:00 AM), the
    return seconds would be (3600 x 3) or 10,800. CVTTIMSEC may be
    helpful when dealing with time values.

CVTTIMSTM

    The Convert Time Stamp command converts a time stamp of 26 bytes
    to a return data structure. Individual fields in the data
    structure contain the the date and time in various formats such as
    CYMD, HHMMSS, the edited date, and the edited time. The CPP
    (TAATINYC) can also be called from a HLL program.

CVTTIMZOND

    The Convert Time Zone Description command converts one, generic,
    or all time zone descriptions to an outfile. This provides a
    simple method of processing time zone information. The outfile
    name is always TIMZONP. The model file is TAATIMZP with a format
    name of TIMZONR.

CVTTMP

    The Convert Temperature command converts from Fahrenheit to
    Celsius or from Celsius to Fahrenheit. The command may only be
    used in a CL program.

CVTTOBIN8

    The Convert to Binary 8 command converts a 20 byte character input
    value to a binary 8 field. This is the inverse of the CVTBIN8 tool
    function. Some system functions deal in 8 byte binary values.
    Neither CL nor RPG III handles 8 byte binary values. RPG IV does.
    The value to convert must be right adjusted and passed in a *CHAR
    LEN(20) value.

CVTTOBYT

    The Convert to Bytes command allows a conversion from bytes to
    kilobytes, megabytes, etc. The companion command is Convert From
    Bytes which converts from kilobytes, megabytes etc to bytes.

CVTTOMSGQ

    The Convert To Message Queue command reads the output file
    (MSGLSTP) from CVTMSGQ and writes the messages to a specified
    message queue. Only *COMP, *DIAG, and *INFO message types are
    written. This allows copying messages from one message queue to
    another. See the CPYMSGQ command for a direct method of copying
    messages from one message queue to another.

CVTUSRIDX

    The Convert User Index command creates an outfile of the entries
    from a user index. The outfile includes fields for the attributes
    of the user index as well as the entry information. The outfile
    created is named USRIDXP.

CVTUSRPRF2

    The Convert User Profile 2 command converts the DSPUSRPRF outfile
    to an externally described file containing all of the fields in
    the QADSPUPB outfile plus individual fields for each of the
    special authorities, each of the supplemental groups, etc. This
    allows a simple query to use the individual fields for analysis.

CVTUSRSPCA

    The Convert User Space Attributes command builds an outfile of one
    or more User Space objects. The outfile created is named USRSPCP.
    The outfile may then be queried for consistency or searching for
    specific values such as the Auto Extend option.

CVTVOLSTAT

    Convert Volume Statistics to a Data Base File. The PRTERRLOG
    command is used to access the volume statistics. The data is read
    and placed in an output file. This is helpful for determining when
    bad media exists. Release dependent function.

CVTWRKACT

    Convert WRKACTJOB. Converts the WRKACTJOB information to a data
    base file. Uses system supported APIs including QUSRJOBI to access
    the information. Useful for determining what the active jobs are
    doing if anything.

CVTWRKSBS

    Convert WRKSBS. Converts the WRKSBS information to a data base
    file. Useful for determining if any active jobs exist for a
    subsystem or the entire system.

CVTWRKSPLF

    Convert WRKSPLF. Converts the WRKSPLF information to a data base
    file. Uses the API QUSRSPLA. Useful for determining all spooled
    files for a given user, all users, or by form type.

CVTWRKUSR

    Convert WRKUSRJOB. Converts the WRKUSRJOB information to a data
    base file. Uses the API QUSRJOBI. Useful for determining all jobs
    for a given user, all users, or on output queues.

DEBUG

    The Debug tool is not code, but rather a technique to assist in
    debugging. It can also be used for any function where you are
    repeating several commands on a command entry display. It allows
    you to quickly execute a command that you had entered earlier in
    an interactive job. The Debug tool uses the FAVCMD tool to store
    the commands.

DEV

    Device Status. This is a shorthand method of accessing WRKCFGSTS.
    The typical use is to ask for the status of generic devices such
    as PRT,TAP, or DKT. Useful for minimizing keystrokes to determine
    the status.

DIVIDE

    The Divide command provides a quotient, a remainder, and a decimal
    fraction after dividing a dividend by a divisor. The CL division
    function does not provide for a remainder. All variables must be
    specified as *DEC LEN(15 0).

DLTCMDSRC

    Delete Command and Source. You name the command and it deletes
    both the command definition object and the source that was used to
    create the command. Useful for quickly cleaning up mistakes or
    'one time' functions.

DLTDBFDAT

    The Delete Data Base Date command deletes (or checks for deletion)
    records from a data base file based on a comparison of a field
    value and a specified date and operator. Different date formats
    are valid for character, zoned, packed, date, or time stamp
    fields. DLTDBFDAT can assist in cleaning up files.

DLTDBFRCD

    The Delete Data Base Records command deletes records in a file
    based on a value in a single field. The user of the command must
    have all rights to the file. OPNQRYF is used internally to select
    the records to provide for fast processing. DLTDBFRCD provides a
    simple cleanup function.

DLTDEPLGL

    Delete Dependent Logical Files. Operates on physical files, but
    does not delete the physical file. Useful anytime a physical must
    be re-created and it has dependent logicals. See also RPLPF and
    RBLDBF.

DLTDLUSPLF

    The Delete Deleted User Spooled Files command checks all spooled
    files on the system to determine if the user still exists. If the
    user does not exist, an action parameter determines whether the
    spooled file is listed or listed/deleted. This allows a cleanup of
    when a user profile is deleted that owns one or more spooled
    files.

DLTDSAPRF

    The Delete Disabled Profile tool provides a cleanup function to
    allow disabled profiles to be deleted after N days. You must run a
    nightly job that is entered into the job scheduler by the
    STRDSAPRF command. Q name profiles and PWD(*NONE) profiles are
    never deleted. The default provides a check of what the command
    would do.

DLTDUPRCD

    The Delete Duplicate Records command deletes duplicate records in
    a named file based on a series of key fields. By default, only a
    listing is output with what would occur if ACTION(*DELETE) was
    specified. When *DELETE is specified, the first duplicate record
    of a group is retained and the others are deleted.

DLTENDLIC

    The Delete End TAA License command provides a method of resetting
    the TAA license if ENDTAALIC had been used previously. This is
    intended for a situation where a mistake has been made or a change
    of plans has occurred after ending the TAA license. DLTENDLIC
    requires a special software code that may be requested from the
    TAA Productivity Tools owner.

DLTEVENT

    The Delete EVENT command deletes the EVFEVENT files in one or more
    libraries. EVFEVENT files are created by ILE compilers and
    debuggers and may consume a large amount of space. Only one file
    will exist per library, but will contain a member for each
    program. If you don't have any, using STRTRCDBG will create one.

DLTFSRC

    Delete File and Source. You name the file object and it deletes
    both the file object and the source that was used to create the
    file. Useful for quickly cleaning up mistakes or 'one time'
    functions.

DLTGENLIB

    The Delete Generic Library command deletes one library or generic
    libraries. You must have *ALLOBJ special authority to use
    DLTGENLIB. You cannot delete a library beginning with the letter Q
    or the letters TAA.

DLTGENPRF

    The Delete Generic Profile command deletes profiles using a
    generic user profile name. User profiles starting with the letter
    'Q' or owned by the system cannot be deleted. The default is
    ACTION(*CHECK) which does not delete any profiles.

DLTGRCKEY

    The Delete Grace Key command is a companion command to CRTGRCKEY.
    CRTGRCKEY is used to allow the use of the TAA Tools for a grace
    period on a system that does not have a valid license. CRTGRCKEY
    may only be used once on a system unless a reset occurs. DLTGRCKEY
    provides a reset function, but requires a special software code
    that may be requested from the TAA Productivity Tools owner.

DLTIFS

    The Delete IFS tool allows deletion of one or more IFS objects
    based on selection criteria such as size, last used date, etc. You
    must be authorized to the TAACVTIFS authorization list and must
    have *OBJEXIST rights to the object to be deleted. A listing is
    output of the results. You cannot delete a directory type object
    that contains objects (see the DLTIFSDIR tool for this function).
    Both the DLTIFS and DLTIFS2 commands are supported.

DLTIFSDIR

    The Delete IFS Directory command optionally deletes a directory
    and all sub items within the directory including other
    directories. The default is 'check' which produces a listing of
    what would be deleted and any errors such as 'not authorized to
    delete'. Several catastrophic operations are prevented such as
    deleting the root ('/'), /QDLS, and /QSYS/LIB.

DLTIFSOWN

    The Delete IFS Owner command deletes all IFS objects owned by a
    user profile. This allows a simple means of IFS cleanup. You must
    have *ALLOBJ special authority to use DLTIFSOWN.

DLTJOBDLIB

    The Delete Job Description Library command deletes a library from
    the INLLIBL attribute of one or more job descriptions. This
    command is useful if a library has been deleted and should be
    removed from any Job Descriptions. No error occurs if the library
    is not found in a Job Description.

DLTJOBLOG

    The Delete Job Log command deletes old job logs between a range of
    dates that match a list of specified job completion codes. The
    default is to delete all existing job logs that have had a normal
    completion (Completion code = 00). This allows a simple removal of
    job log clutter.

DLTJOBSPLF

    The Delete Job's Spooled Files command deletes the spooled files
    for a specified job. The major intent of the command is to be used
    in batch where spooled files may be created that are not needed if
    the job ends normally. If a user has multiple interactive jobs and
    one creates excess spooled files, DLTJOBSPLF may be used to
    cleanup.

DLTLIB2

    The Delete Library 2 command is like the system DLTLIB command,
    but also deletes objects that can cause DLTLIB to fail such as
    dependent logical files in a different library, constraints
    specified by ADDPFCST, receivers that have not been saved, and
    output queues with entries. Some exceptions exist that may prevent
    the library from being deleted.

DLTLIB3

    The Delete Library 3 command provides a simple front end to DLTLIB
    and cleans up the low level messages. When the system DLTLIB
    command is used, low level messages are sent for each object that
    is deleted. DLTLIB3 cleans up the messages if the library is
    successfully deleted. If an error occurs, all messages will still
    exist.

DLTLSTUSE

    The Delete Last Used command deletes objects in a library based on
    the last used date and the number of days specified. If an object
    has never been used, the create date is used instead. DLTLSTUSE
    provides a cleanup when objects are no longer being used.

DLTMSGQMSG

    The Delete Message Queue Messages command is an alternative to the
    RMVMSGQMSG command. DLTMSGQMSG is intended to be used when there
    are too many messages in a message queue for RMVMSGQMSG to be
    used. DLTMSGQMSG uses a different technique than RMVMSGQMSG.
    Messages may be deleted by a count or within a date range or both.

DLTOBJTYP

    The Delete Object Type command allows you to delete one, generic,
    or all a list of object types in a library. Most popular object
    types are supported. If *FILE type objects are requested, all non
    physical files are deleted first. A spooled file describes the
    results. An escape message will occur if not all of the requested
    objects can be deleted.

DLTOBJ2

    Delete Object 2. Deletes a named object or generic objects without
    having to know the object type. Most typical programming object
    types (*PGM, *FILE ...) are supported. An option exists to ignore
    any CPF2105 escape messages caused by the object not being in
    existence. Useful for programmed cleanup or re-create operations
    and particularly when generic names have been used.

DLTOLDOBJ

    The Delete Old Object command deletes old objects in a library
    based on the create date of the objects and the number of days
    specified. If your approach is to create temporary objects in a
    permanent library and cleanup periodically based on the create
    date, DLTOLDOBJ may be useful.

DLTOLDQRPL

    Delete Old QRPLOBJ Objects. Allows the clearing of the QRPLOBJ
    library based on a number of hours that the object has existed in
    QRPLOBJ. This allows a safer method of clearing QRPLOBJ for those
    users that do not frequently IPL. The use of CLRLIB on QRPLOBJ can
    cause problems if a user is still using one of the replaced
    objects.

DLTOLDSPLF

    Delete Old Spooled Files. Based on a specified date, it deletes
    old spooled files from an output queue or all output queues. An
    option exists to move the spooled files that are older than the
    specified date to a common queue so they may be reviewed and then
    manually deleted. The Operational Assistant will only delete
    certain system spooled files. DLTOLDSPLF will delete any spooled
    files.

DLTOLDUSR

    The Delete Old User command checks user profiles and provides an
    option to delete the profile if the user has not signed on for a
    specified period of days. System provided profiles are never
    deleted. User profiles without a password are never deleted. The
    command provides a simple cleanup function for unused profiles.

DLTOWNOBJ

    The Delete Owned Objects command allows an *ALLOBJ user to delete
    the objects that are owned by another profile. The command
    defaults to ACTION(*CHECK) to allow a review of the objects that
    would be deleted.

DLTPGMSRC

    Delete Program and Source. You name the program and it deletes
    both the program and the source that was used to create the
    program. Useful for quickly cleaning up mistakes or 'one time'
    functions.

DLTPNDJLG

    The Delete Pending Job Log command deletes job log information
    (not QPJOBLOG spooled files) where the job log information is in a
    'PENDING' status. A 'number of days' pending may be specified to
    delete only the job log information that has been pending for n
    days. Specific, generic, or all jobs/users may be named. The
    QWTRMVJL API is used.

DLTQHST

    Delete QHST. Deletes old log versions from QHST. A parameter
    determines the number of days to keep. Useful for cleaning up
    QHST.

DLTSECTOOL

    The Delete Security Tool command allows a deletion of the
    sensitive security TAA Tools (those that create or change user
    profiles such as INZPWD and CPYUSRPRF2). With proper security in
    place, these tools may safely exist and be used. However, some
    installations may prefer to delete these tools to avoid any
    possibility of their use.

DLTTAACMD

    Delete TAA Commands. Provides a method of deleting TAA commands
    and other TAA objects from a command library. The concept of a
    command library is described in the information member "Library
    List Requirements" on the HELPTAA menu. The companion tool is
    DUPTAACMD.

DLTTAATOOL

    Delete TAA Tool. Deletes a TAA tool from the TAATOOL library and
    optionally removes the source.

DLTUNULIB

    The Delete Unused Library command deletes libraries that have 1)
    no objects, 2) all objects within the library have never been
    used, or 3) the object within the library with the most recently
    last used date has not been used for a specified number of days.
    The default is ACTION(*CHECK) so that only a listing is output of
    what would be deleted.

DLTUSRPRF2

    The Delete User Profile tool is designed for Assistant Security
    Officers to be able to delete a user profile. QSECOFR cannot be
    deleted nor can any user profile in a Security Officer controlled
    list. The user of the command must be authorized to the TAADLTUSR2
    authorization list. DLTUSRPRF2 is an option on the SECOFR2 menu.

DLTUSRPRF3

    The Delete User Profile command does more than the system
    DLTUSRPRF command by deleting spooled files owned by the user,
    listing job descriptions, and job schedule entries where the user
    is named. A 'check' option is the default to allow you to review
    what will be deleted.

DLTUSRSPLF

    The Delete User Spooled Files command deletes the spooled files
    for a named user in one, generic, or all output queues. The user
    profile does not have to exist which allows cleanup when the user
    profile has been deleted, but still is the owner of spooled files.
    An action parameter determines whether the spooled file is listed
    or listed/deleted.

DLYCMD

    Delay Command Execution. Designed for those jobs which need to
    operate in the restricted state and run them on an unattended
    basis (e.g. RCLSTG, SAVSYS). The command to be executed is entered
    at a workstation in the controlling subsystem just prior to the
    operator going home. The command parameters allow control over
    when the command should be executed for either a time or when a
    specified number of jobs exist in one or more subsystems.

DLYHLDSPLF

    The Delay Hold Spooled File command submits a batch job to
    QSYSNOMAX to run HLDSPLF after a delay time of a specified number
    of seconds. This allows a processing program to perform functions
    while the spooled file is the READY status.

DLYJOBLOOP

    The Delay Job Loop command simplifies the case where you are in a
    loop waiting for some event to occur such as a subsystem to end.
    Because an unusual event might occur, good coding practice would
    be to place a limit on the number of times the program will wait
    for the event to occur. DLYJOBLOOP supports a LOOPLIMIT parameter
    that allows the command to send the CPF9898 escape message if the
    limit is reached.

DLYJOB2

    The Delay Job 2 command provides the capability to wait for a
    number of seconds. DLYJOB2 differs from the system DLYJOB command
    in that a wait time of less than one second may be specified. The
    number of seconds entered is specified as a 15/5 field. The CPP
    can be called directly from a HLL Program.

DLYPWRDWN

    Delay Power down. Provides a method of powering down the system
    when no activity exists in a subsystem. Useful for when batch is
    running unattended and the system should be powered down when all
    work in the batch subsystem is complete.

DLYRLSSPLF

    The Delay Release Spooled File command submits a batch job to
    QSYSNOMAX to run RLSSPLF after a delay time of a specified number
    of seconds. This allows a processing program to perform functions
    while the spooled file is the HELD status.

DLYSBMJOB

    The Delay Submit Job command provides a simple solution for
    submitting a job to start in a specified number of seconds,
    minutes, hours, and days. This avoids the use of SBMJOB which
    requires the SCDDATE and SCDTIME parameters to do a simple submit
    after a time delay. The DLYSBMJOB job would be placed on the
    QSYSNOMAX job queue with the generated SCDDATE and ENDTIME
    parameters and would submit the requested job (and command) after
    the delay.

DMOCTLLVL

    The Demo Control Level tool provides a demonstration and standard
    source that can be copied to provide a procedural RPG program that
    handles up to 3 control breaks. After copying the source, use a
    source editor and follow the instructions for how to modify the
    source for your requirements. Both RPG III and RPG IV versions are
    provided.

DMOLSTAPI

    The Demo List API Processing tool provides sample RPG code for
    processing the information from an API that provides a list in a
    user space. A working program exists with instructions within the
    source code for how to modify for your specific case.

DMOSUBF

    Demonstrate Sub File. This is a demonstration and sample code for
    how to code a work subfile that makes changes to data base
    records. The work subfile includes typical options for display,
    change, copy, rename, delete (with confirmation display), and add
    of new data base records. A separate function is DMOSUBF2 which
    performs the same function for a 'Display only' subfile
    application (no changes). For a simpler solution, see CRTSFLPGM.

DMOSUBF3

    The Demo Subfile 3 (Array) command provides a demonstration of a
    subfile loaded from array data. The code provided includes
    comments for how to modify the source to fit your specific needs.
    The subfile provides an option to select one of the entries which
    passes back a parameter of the selected value.

DMOSUBF4

    The Demo Subfile 3 (Window) command provides a demonstration of a
    subfile loaded from array data that is displayed in a window. The
    code provided includes comments for how to modify the source to
    fit your specific needs. The subfile provides an option to select
    one of the entries which passes back a parameter of the selected
    value.

DMOSUBF5

    The Demonstrate Subfile 5 (Array/PosTo) command provides a
    demonstration of a subfile loaded from array data. A 'Position To'
    option is supported. The code provided includes comments for how
    to modify the source to fit your specific needs. The subfile
    provides an option to select one of the entries which causes the
    value to be passed back as a parameter.

DMOSUBF6

    The Demonstrate Subfile 6 (Array/PosTo/Window) command provides a
    demonstration of a subfile loaded from array data which is
    displayed in a window. A 'Position To' option is supported. The
    code provided includes comments for how to modify the source to
    fit your specific needs.

DMOSUBF7

    The Demo Subfile 7 tool provides a demonstration of using a
    subfile for the display of an API call. Customers can take
    advantage of the full source provided to create similar subfile
    based applications.

DMOUIM

    The DMO UIM tool provides a demonstration of using UIM for the
    display of an API call. Customers can take advantage of the full
    source is provided to create their own uses for UIM based
    applications.

DMOVALKEY

    The Demo Validate Key tool is designed to assist in cases where
    keys are to be added to a file, but potential miskeying errors may
    allow the addition of an existing record (or the existing record
    was miskeyed). The Validate Key program returns an array of
    potential alternate keys that can be checked against a data base.

DSAOLDPRF

    The Disable Old Profile command optionally disables user profiles
    that have not been signed onto recently or not at all. Two
    retention periods may be specified for: 1) Profiles that have not
    signed on recently. 2) Profiles that have never signed on.
    Profiles created by the system or are PASSWORD(*NONE) are not
    considered. DSAOLDPRF may be used to minimize the exposure that
    profiles will be inappropriately used.

DSAUSRPRF

    Disable User Profile. Allows an Assistant Security Officer to
    disable a user profile. The user must be authorized to the
    TAADSAPRF authorization list. DSAUSRPRF is also an option on the
    SECOFR2 menu for Assistant Security Officers.

DSPACCPTH

    Display access path. Displays or prints the detail information
    about an access path and each key field. A subfile of key fields
    is displayed with options that allow additional information about
    the key field and to access the field attributes.

DSPACGCDE

    The Display Job Accounting Codes command displays a list of job
    accounting codes in code sequence from both User Profiles and Job
    Descriptions. This simplifies understanding what Job Accounting
    Codes exist and where they are defined.

DSPACGRCD

    The Display Job Accounting Record command allows you to display
    the last record for a job name or user name. The display includes
    the same information as exists in the Job Accounting tool (JOBACG
    is a pre-requisite). You may roll to previous records for the user
    or job.

DSPACGSGN

    The Display Job Accounting Signon command displays the job
    accounting records for interactive jobs within a range of 'From
    date/time' to 'To date/time'. All users or a generic user profile
    name may be entered. The user must have signed off and the Job
    Accounting journal entries converted for the JOBACG tool to find
    the information.

DSPACTJOB

    The Display Active Jobs command provides a display that is similar
    to that provided by the system WRKACTJOB command except that the
    user cannot perform actions against the jobs. An option exists to
    allow a display of any spooled files associated with the job.
    DSPACTJOB may be helpful if you have a menu oriented system and
    want to prevent users from changing, holding, or ending active
    jobs.

DSPACTJOB2

    The Display Active Jobs 2 command provides a display similar to
    the system WRKACTJOB command except that the user can only perform
    the Display action against the jobs, and jobs are sorted by CPU %.
    System and subsystem jobs are excluded.

DSPADP

    Display Adopt. A series of DSPxxxA commands are provided that
    allow a user to be authorized to various display commands so the
    user can display or print any object level information on the
    system (no data can be displayed). This is of value when dealing
    with functions that operate across all libraries of a system or
    when trouble-shooting. Authorization to all of the DSPxxxA
    commands is controlled by the TAADSPADP authorization list.

DSPALLDTAT

    The Display All Data Types command lists or displays the data
    types that are to be included or excluded from a file or files.
    For example, you can display all fields that have a W (variable
    length) data type for files in a library.

DSPALLJLG

    The Display All Job Logs command provides a subfile of all
    QPJOBLOG files and allows them to be displayed. The user must
    have *JOBCTL or be authorized to the TAADSPJLG authorization list.
    Either the system DSPSPLF command or the TAA DSPJOBLOG3 command
    may be used to display the spooled file.

DSPALLPRX

    The Display All Proxy Commands command displays or lists all proxy
    commands for an actual command. An actual command may have several
    proxy commands either on the same chain or as separate chains.
    DSPALLPRX will help you if you are trying to identify all the
    proxy commands created for an actual command.

DSPALLSAVF

    The Display All Save Files command displays or prints a listing of
    one, generic, or all save files in one or more libraries. A
    minimum size may be specified to help determine the large save
    files that are on the system. A special minimum size value *NONCLR
    will find all save files that are not empty.

DSPALLSPCA

    The Display All Special Authorities command displays the special
    authorities for an individual user, the special authorities for
    his group profile, and the special authorities for each of his
    supplemental profiles. This allows a review of what special
    authorities the user is allowed to use.

DSPALLSPLF

    The Display All Spooled files command provides a subfile of
    selected spooled files in a 'display only' function. Any user may
    use the command to display his own spooled files. To display
    spooled files owned by other users, the current user must be
    authorized to the TAAALLSPLF authorization list. Standard options
    exist to display data or attributes plus parameter controlled
    options.

DSPAPYPTF

    The Display Applied PTFs command displays objects that have a PTF
    number applied. One, generic, or all objects by type may be
    displayed in one or more libraries.

DSPARACDE

    The Display Area Code command provides a subfile display of the
    area codes for US and Canada along with the major cities in each
    area code. A 'Position To' field exists as well as the ability to
    select only a specific state or province. Time zone information is
    also provided. Helpful for determining where someone is located
    when an area code is known or determining what area codes exist by
    state.

DSPARPTBL

    The Display ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Table command
    displays or prints the ARP table information for a specified line
    description. Address Resolution Protocol allows physically
    distinct networks to appear as if they were a single, logical
    network. The QtocLstPhyIfsARPTbl API is used to extract the
    values.

DSPASPA2

    The Display ASP (Auxiliary Storage Pool) Attributes 2 command
    displays or prints a brief description of the important status and
    description information about an ASP. This includes the total
    storage capacity, the percent used, the amount of remaining
    storage, the type of ASP, the threshold percent, and the amount of
    overflowed storage if any.

DSPASPSTS2

    The Display ASP Status 2 command provides an interactive display
    of the disk units by ASP. The information displayed is taken from
    WRKDSKSTS for each disk unit. Summary totals are shown for each
    ASP. DSPASPSTS provides a simple means of helping to manage an
    ASP.

DSPAUDCMD

    The Display Audit Command command displays or lists audit records
    for a specific user for the AUDLVL(*CMD) function. The AUDLOGP
    file (AUDLOG tool) is used. The user must be specified as
    CHGUSRAUD AUDLVL(*CMD) which causes an audit entry for each
    command executed (including commands run in CL programs or REXX
    procedures). DSPAUDCMD provides a tailored solution for the 'T CD
    C' journal entries.

DSPAUDLOG2

    Display Audit Log 2. Displays or prints the audit log journal
    (QAUDJRN) with various selection options. This is the old form of
    DSPAUDLOG which is not supported for newer audit entries.

DSPAUDRCD

    The Display Audit Record command works with the files created by
    the AUDLOG tool to display the last audit record for a user or
    job. The display includes the same information as exists in the
    DSPAUDLOG detail record display including the ability to use F6 to
    access the details of the audit information.

DSPAUTLOB2

    The Display Auth List Objects 2 command differs from the system
    DSPAUTLOBJ command by 1) providing *IFS and *DLS objects in
    addition to library objects and 2) allowing a generic name or all
    Authorization Lists. The full path name (up to 5000 bytes) is
    displayed or listed.

DSPBOF

    The Display Based On File command displays the based on physical
    file members for a logical file. This provides a simpler means of
    determining the based on file members rather than using DSPFD.
    Other information about the access path is also displayed.

DSPCCSID

    The Display File CCSIDs command displays either a total of the
    CCSIDs that exist in a data base file or the CCSIDs for the
    individual fields. If different CCSIDs are used within the file,
    different processing may be required. DSPCCSID allows you to
    determine if a file uses a standard CCSID for all character fields
    and what the value is.

DSPCLC

    The Display Calculator command provides a simple calculator with
    add, subtract, multiply, and divide functions. The command is
    intended for simple calculator needs on any type of workstation.

DSPCLPCALL

    The Display CLP Call Parameters command provides a spooled file
    with one or all of the Call statements in a CL source member
    printed and the attributes of the passed parameters. The columnar
    display can make it easier to understand the important
    characteristics about the parameters.

DSPCLPCMD

    The Display CLP Command command displays commands from the CLPCMDP
    file created by CVTCLPCMD. Various search criteria such as the
    source file library may be named. DSPCLPCMD provides a fast access
    for where a specific command name has been used.

DSPCLPCNT

    The Display CLP Count command counts the number of lines of
    commands in a CL source member, generic members, or all members in
    a source file. Comment lines and blank lines are also counted. A
    percentage of comments is provided. DSPCLPCNT provides a better
    understanding of the amount of actual source versus a count of the
    number of statements in a source member.

DSPCLPDO

    Display CLP DO Groups. Displays the DO groups (in a similar manner
    as RPG) in CLP source. This provides a simple means of determining
    where DO group errors exist. Useful for program comprehension and
    fixing the problems caused by the CL compiler diagnostics relative
    to unbalanced DO statements. See also PRTCLPDO.

DSPCLPPARM

    The Display CLP Parameters command provides a spooled file with
    one line for each parameter passed to the program. The columnar
    display can make it easier to understand the important
    characteristics about the parameters. The source member must be
    identified.

DSPCLPSRC

    The Display CLP Source command displays or lists the source for a
    CLP type program (CLP, CLP38 and CLLE). If the source does not
    exist for a CLP or CLP38 program (non-TAA), a prompt occurs asking
    if RTVCLSRC should be used and a display occurs after retrieval.
    If a TAA program is specified and the user is authorized to the
    TAASRCACC Authorization List, the source in the TAA Archive is
    displayed.

DSPCLPVAR

    The Display CLP Variables command provides a spooled file with one
    line for each variable declared in the program. This is basically
    the same information that is available on a compiler listing, but
    the information can be accessed faster with DSPCLPVAR. Sequence
    number references are not included. The variables appear in
    alphabetical sequence with their attribute information.

DSPCMDAUT

    The Display Command Authority command displays the required
    authorities and typical exceptions for popular system commands.
    Not all commands are supported. The display describes the
    authorities (such as *OBJOPR or *READ) that are required to
    operate on an object. Notes also appear if applicable.

DSPCMDCNT

    The Display CMD Count command counts the number of lines of
    commands in a CMD source member, generic members, or all members
    in a source file. Comment lines and blank lines are also counted.
    A percentage of comments is provided. DSPCMDCNT provides a better
    understanding of the amount of actual source versus a count of the
    number of statements in a source member.

DSPCMDHLP

    The Display Command Help command displays the help text for a
    system or user command including commands the user is not
    authorized to. The command is useful for such functions as
    attempting to simulate the system command line function. The
    QCAPCMD API is used.

DSPCMDKWD

    Display command keyword. Displays a subfile of keywords used by
    commands. Two special values allow access to the files supplied in
    TAATOOL for access to all commands in QSYS and all commands in
    TAATOOL. Assists in understanding where keywords are used and in
    selecting a keyword name.

DSPCMDKWD2

    The Display Command Keyword 2 command displays or prints a simple
    list of the keywords used by a command. QSYS and TAATOOL command
    information is supplied in TAATOOL. User commands must be
    converted to a file using CVTCMDKWD.

DSPCMDPARM

    The Display Command Parameters command provides a spooled file
    with one line for each parameter of a command. The columnar
    display can make it easier to understand the important
    characteristics about the parameters. The source member must be
    identified.

DSPCMDSRC

    The Display Command Source command displays or lists the command
    source for a command. If the source does not exist for a non-TAA
    command, a prompt occurs asking if RTVCMDSRC should be used and a
    display occurs after retrieval. If a TAA command is specified and
    the user is authorized to the TAASRCACC Authorization List, the
    source in the TAA Archive is displayed.

DSPCOLORA

    The Display Color Attributes command displays the various
    combinations of the COLOR and DSPATR keywords. A color display is
    needed. The intent of the display is to allow you to select the
    proper combination of how you want a field displayed.

DSPCOMPCDE

    The Display Completion Codes command displays the job completion
    codes described in the CPF1164 message. This provides a quick
    review.

DSPCRTDAT

    The Display Create Date command provides a display or listing of
    objects with selection on the create date and time. The default
    displays the objects in descending create date and time order.
    DSPCRTDAT may be useful in understanding recent changes.

DSPCRTUSR

    The Display Create User command displays or lists objects and
    compares the 'create user' to the 'current owner'. A specific
    'create user' may be selected. Differences are flagged. DSPCRTUSR
    may be helpful in understanding changes that have occurred.

DSPCURUSR

    The Display Current User command is similar to the WRKUSRJOB
    system command except that the current user of the job is also
    shown and no change options are allowed. This allows support for
    jobs that swap profiles to be displayed. Only active jobs are
    displayed.

DSPDAT

    The Display Date command provides a convenient method of
    displaying information about the current date or any date in a
    range of Jan 1, 1941 to Dec 31, 2040. The fully spelled out date,
    the day of the week, the week of the year, and other values are
    shown.

DSPDATFMT

    The Display Date Formats command displays the valid formats for
    data base date fields (Type = L). Examples of each DATFMT option
    are displayed. Job date formats are also displayed along with the
    timestamp layout (Type Z).

DSPDB

    Display Data Base. Displays an externally described file by
    placing the field names and values for a single record on a
    display. Converts packed to character and edits fields. Allows
    either relative record number or a key. Rollup and down are
    supported. Useful for problem determination or debugging.

DSPDBF

    Display Data Base File. Provides a simple front end to the RUNQRY
    command. This allows a simple review of the data in any data base
    file and supports selection criteria. The results are displayed or
    printed and are always provided in arrival sequence order.

DSPDBFA

    The Display Data Base File Attributes command displays two pages
    of the important attributes of data base files. Function keys
    allow access to other 'display only' options. The command provides
    a simpler interface than using the system DSPFD command.

DSPDBFALW

    The Display Data Base File Allow Functions command displays the
    options for 'allow update' and 'allow delete' that may be set for
    physical data base files. A listing is produced of either all
    files or only those which have specified either of the 'allow'
    options. The intent of DSPDBFALW is to allow a review of these
    options.

DSPDBFDMG

    The Display Data Base Damage command checks for damage in the data
    base file descriptive information. Each file processed is used by
    CHKOBJ, RTVOBJD, various forms of DSPFD, and DSPFFD. An outfile of
    the damaged files is optional. The data itself is not checked.
    DSPDBFDMG is intended for the case when an abnormal system
    termination has occurred and you suspect data base damage.

DSPDBFDTA

    The Display Data Base File Data command displays or prints data
    from a single record in a file (using Relative Record number) or
    from a passed in image of a record (such as a journal entry). The
    command will operate on any externally described file. The output
    is one line per field whether a subfile or listing occurs.

DSPDBFFLD

    The Display Data Base Field command displays the attribute
    information for a field in a physical file or a single format
    logical file. The attributes include such things as the length,
    decimal positions, buffer position in the record, text, and column
    headings.

DSPDBFJOIN

    The Display Data Base Join Files command displays or lists one or
    more join files in one or more libraries. The From and To file
    information is provided along with the name of the keys from each
    file.

DSPDBFKEY

    The Display Data Base File by Key command displays or prints
    records from a single format data base file in keyed sequence. The
    key fields appear as the first fields in the listing. Any
    remaining fields that fit into the 378 maximum wide print line are
    also listed. DSPDBFKEY is a front end to the PRTDB key which
    allows listing fields by name.

DSPDBFREL

    Display data base relations. Similar to the system command DSPDBR
    except that the list of dependent files is displayed in a subfile.
    Options exist to display the file attributes or the access path
    description.

DSPDBFSTAT

    The Display Data Base File Statistics command displays usage
    statistics for a physical file data member. Each dependent logical
    file is also shown. The system data base statistics are used which
    are reset at each IPL.

DSPDDSCNT

    The Display DDS Count command counts the number of lines in a DDS
    source member, generic members, or all members in a source file.
    Comment lines and blank lines are also counted. A percentage of
    comments is provided. DSPDDSCNT provides a better understanding of
    the amount of actual source versus a count of the number of
    statements in a source member.

DSPDEPLGL

    The Display Dependent Logical command provides a display of the
    dependent logical files of a physical file. A physical file must
    be specified for the FILE parameter. An option exists from the
    display to access other options such as the access path
    information.

DSPDEVCHR

    The Display Device Character command displays the characters for
    the hex values X'40' - X'FF'. This can be helpful when attempting
    to provide a unique character for the display. A second display is
    available to show the typical characters required to cause
    underlining, hi-lighting, etc.

DSPDFTRCD

    The Display Default Records command displays the Relative Record
    numbers of the records in a file that match the default record
    used by the system when adding a new record. It is possible for an
    application or a utility like DFU to add a default record as an
    error. DSPDFTRCD will find these conditions, but not all may
    indicate an error. You must decide based on your application.

DSPDLTSPC

    The Display Deleted Space command displays the amount of deleted
    record space that exists in one or more libraries. If variable
    length fields exist, the allocated length is considered rather
    than the maximum record length. An omit list of libraries may also
    be specified.

DSPDSKSTS

    The Display Disk Status command displays or lists information
    about the disks attached to the system. The display differs from
    the system WRKDSKSTS command in that fewer statistics are shown,
    but the data is grouped by ASP with additional information about
    each hardware resource. The data is accessed from the TAA
    CVTDSKSTS command.

DSPDSTDAT

    The Display DST (Daylight Savings Time) Date command displays or
    lists the start and end date/times for daylight savings time for a
    time zone in a specific year. The system support for Time Zone
    Descriptions does not include actual dates of change.

DSPDSTQ

    The Display Distribution Queue command is a simple front end to
    the system WRKDSTQ command. Only a display is provided so no
    changes are allowed. WRKDSTQ is set as *PUBLIC(*EXCLUDE). DSPDSTQ
    adopts the authority of QSECOFR so that any user may review the
    contents of a distribution queue or all distribution queues.

DSPDTAARAD

    The Display Data Area Description command displays or prints the
    attributes of a data area. The data area value is not shown.

DSPDTAQ

    The Display Data Queue command displays or prints the entries of a
    data queue and the data queue attributes. An API is used to
    extract the information which does not remove any entries. The
    entry may be displayed in character or hexadecimal. If a *KEYED
    data queue exists, the key information may be displayed.

DSPDTAQD

    The Display data queue description command displays or prints the
    attributes of a data queue object. The information includes the
    create attributes plus the current number of entries and the
    number of entries that can be made before an overflow occurs.

DSPDTATYP

    The Display Data Base Data Types command displays a listing of the
    data base types that may be entered in DDS and appear in DSPFFD
    output. This provides a simple online aid.

DSPDUPCMD

    Display Duplicate Command is intended to check if duplicate
    command names exist in two libraries or in one library and the
    rest of the system. Having duplicate command names can be an
    integrity or security exposure. The typical uses would be to
    ensure your user command names are not found in either QSYS or
    TAATOOL.

DSPDUPFLD

    The Display Duplicate Field command checks a specific field or
    fields in a data base member for duplicates. The file is sorted on
    up to 6 fields and a program checks for duplicate values. Up to 3
    print fields may be specified to help identify the records that
    have duplicate values.

DSPDUPJBQE

    The Display Duplicate Job Queue Entries command displays or lists
    job queue names that are duplicates in different subsystems.
    DSPDUPJBQE can be used to help identify problems where the same
    job queue is used

DSPDUPJOB

    The Display Duplicate Jobs command provides a display of jobs
    based on a job name. A subfile of jobs that match the selection
    criteria is displayed. A detail display of simple job information
    is available as well as a function key to access DSPJOB data. The
    major intent of the tool is to allow a call to a DSPDUPJOB program
    with a return parameter list. This allows the end user to select a
    job for further processing when duplicate jobs exist.

DSPDUPKEY

    The Display Duplicate Key command checks a keyed file that has not
    been specified for Unique keys to see if any duplicate keys exist.
    The file is read in keyed order per the key fields defined for the
    file and compared to the previous record. The relative record
    numbers of any duplicates are described.

DSPDUPPRFA

    The Display Duplicate Profile Attributes command displays or lists
    the profiles that have duplicates for such attributes as Initial
    Program, Job Description, User Class, etc. This provides a review
    of where changes may be needed.

DSPEDTCDE

    Display Edit Code. Provides an online version of the Edit Code
    table (e.g. commas, zero balances to print, etc.). The simple
    command is more convenient than looking anywhere else.

DSPEMTARA

    The Display Empty Data Area command displays one or more data
    areas that have no value or a zero value (*DEC type *DTAARA). A
    flag may be set if the data area has not been changed (such as by
    CHGDTAARA) in the last n days. An option exists to list all data
    areas. DSPEMTARA can be helpful in cleaning up unused data areas.

DSPEMTAUTL

    The Display Empty Authorization List command displays
    Authorization Lists (not owned by QSYS) that do not control any
    objects. This includes library objects, IFS objects, and DLS
    objects. An option exists to include all Authorization Lists (not
    owned by QSYS).

DSPEMTDBF

    The Display Empty Data Base File command displays data base files
    that have no members. A flag may be set if the data base file has
    not been used in the last n days. An option exists to list all
    data base files. DSPEMTDBF can be helpful in cleaning up unused
    data base files.

DSPEMTDTAQ

    The Display Empty Data Queue command displays one or more data
    queues that have no entries. A flag may be set if the data queue
    has not been changed (such as not having received an entry) in the
    last n days. An option exists to list all data queues. DSPEMTDTAQ
    can be helpful in cleaning up unused data queues.

DSPEMTIFS

    The Display Empty IFS command is a front-end to DSPIFS to provide
    a listing of the empty IFS stream files. Stream files that have an
    object size of 0 are displayed. Note that this is not the
    allocated size of the stream file. The DSPIFS command is used
    internally and the output appears with the title of 'Display IFS'.

DSPEMTJOBQ

    The Display Empty Job Queue command displays one or more job
    queues that have no jobs. A flag may be set if the job queue has
    not been used (such as not having any jobs added) in the last n
    days. An option exists to list all job queues. DSPEMTJOBQ can be
    helpful in cleaning up unused job queues.

DSPEMTLIB

    The Display Empty Libraries command displays or lists one or more
    libraries that have no objects. The command performs quickly as
    the simplest form of the API to retrieve object information is
    used.

DSPEMTMBR

    The Display Empty Members command displays or prints the empty
    members for one, generic, or all files in one or more libraries.
    Size information is also supplied to point out space savings that
    can be achieved for members that are no longer needed. The size
    information includes the data and access path size, but not the
    member description object which can be up to 20K bytes.

DSPEMTMSGF

    The Display Empty Message File command displays one or more
    message files that have no message IDs. A flag may be set if the
    message file has not been used in the last n days. An option
    exists to list all message files. DSPEMTMSGF can be helpful in
    cleaning up unused message files.

DSPEMTMSGQ

    The Display Empty Message Queue command displays one or more
    message queues that have no messages. A flag may be set if the
    message queue has not been changed (such as not having received a
    message) in the last n days. An option exists to display all
    message queues. DSPEMTMSGQ can be helpful in cleaning up unused
    message queues.

DSPEMTOUTQ

    The Display Empty Output Queue command displays one or more output
    queues that have no entries. A flag may be set if the output queue
    has not been used (such as not having any spooled files) in the
    last n days. An option exists to list all output queues.
    DSPEMTOUTQ can be helpful in cleaning up unused output queues.

DSPEMTSAVF

    The Display Empty Save File command displays or lists one or more
    save files that have no objects. The default is to bypass save
    file names beginning with Q as there may be many PTF save files in
    existence.

DSPEMTSPC

    The Display Empty User Space command displays or lists one or more
    User Space objects where the User Space contains only the initial
    value described when CRTUSRSPC was used. An option exists to list
    all User Space objects. DSPEMTSPC can be helpful in cleaning up
    unused User Space objects.

DSPERRMSG

    Display Error Message. Provides a solution for handling unexpected
    escape and diagnostic messages from an interactive CL program. The
    command should follow a MONMSG command and the user sees a display
    of both the escape and diagnostic messages on a single display.
    Access to 2nd level text and the message description is provided.

DSPEXCLCK

    The Display Exclusive Locks command displays or lists the
    objects/members that have exclusive locks. This can be a very slow
    running command if many physical file objects are specified to be
    checked as CVTOBJLCK must be used on each to determine if any
    members are locked exclusively. DSPEXCLCK can assist in
    determining what cannot be processed because of exclusive locks.

DSPFCNUSG2

    The Display Function Usage 2 command will show a summary of the
    function IDs used on this system, making it easier to see the
    overall picture of these than using the DSPFCNUSG command of the
    system.

DSPFDTAQ

    Display File Data Queue. The code is an example only of how to
    handle a display file with the data queue parameter. This allows
    the program to receive control when either a workstation enter key
    or a data queue entry arrives. Two examples are shown 1) an
    interrupt example, and 2) a refresh example.

DSPFLDA

    Display field attributes. Displays the attributes of a single
    field in a file. The file can be a physical or a single format
    logical. The CPP can be invoked from any HLL program. Useful for
    applications which want to allow the user to access the specific
    attributes of a single field.

DSPFLDUSE

    The Display Field Use tool allows a 'where used' function of the
    fields in externally described files. The Display command provides
    access to the definition of a field and the files that use the
    field. The CVTFLDUSE command must be used periodically to convert
    the system DSPFFD outfile information to files used by DSPFLDUSE.

DSPFMT

    Display format. Displays a subfile of the fields in a physical
    file or a single format logical file. The subfile display provides
    enough information for most uses and a detail display of seldom
    used attributes is also available for each field. A print option
    is also available.

DSPFMTSEQ

    The Display Format Sequence command displays the fields in a
    physical or single format logical file in various sequences such
    as by field name or type and length. When a file has a large
    number of fields, DSPFMTSEQ may be helpful in reviewing the fields
    in the format.

DSPFSTSPLF

    The Display First Spooled File Status command displays the status
    of the first spooled file on an output queue for the current user.
    It describes how many other spooled files and pages must be
    printed before the users first spooled file is printed. This
    provides a simple function for end users to determine when their
    spooled file will be printed.

DSPF2

    Display file 2. Displays a list of files matching a generic name
    in a subfile and allows options for such functions as the file
    attributes, the access path information, the format of the file,
    any data base relations, and to display the data.

DSPGENOBJ

    The Display Generic Object command displays, prints a list, or
    creates an outfile of objects. A single object, all objects, a
    generic name, or a name including wild card characters may be
    used. If a display is requested, an option exists to use the TAA
    Display Object Description command which provides more information
    about the object.

DSPGRPPRF

    The Display Group Profile command displays or prints the members
    of a group and detail information. The command is an improvement
    over the system DSPUSRPRF OPTION(*GRPPRF) function in that
    information about the individual members is displayed.

DSPGRPPRFI

    The Display Group Profile Indicator command displays whether a
    profile is a group profile (has members in its group). You must
    have *ALLOBJ authority to use DSPGRPPRFI. Use the DSPGRPPRF
    command to list the members of the group.

DSPHEX

    Display Hex and other things. Provides a convenient interactive
    method of converting 1) a binary value to decimal 2) a decimal
    value to binary 3) an EBCDIC value to Hex 4) a Hex value to EBCDIC
    5) K,M,G,T values to decimal. The command also provides convenient
    displays for 1) Bit settings 2) Powers of 2 to the 54th 3) EBCDIC
    values 4) Prime numbers up to 255.

DSPHEXOBJ

    The Display Hex Object Type command allows the input of an
    external object type (such as *DTAQ) and displays the internal
    hexadecimal value (such 0A01). It also allows the input of an
    internal object type (such as 0201) and displays the external
    object type (such as *PGM). The display may also be used for
    conversions.

DSPHOLIDAY

    The Display USA Holidays command displays a window of the major US
    holidays for a specific year. The actual date and day of week are
    also displayed. A print option and an outfile option are also
    available.

DSPIFS

    The Display IFS command provides a display or listing of IFS
    objects. The outfile from the TAA command CVTIFS is used for the
    data. Different selection criteria can be specified as well as a
    sort on one of the fields. A standard listing format is used.
    DSPIFS can be used to eliminate the need to write simple query
    functions of IFS data.

DSPIFSAUD

    The Display IFS Auditing command displays the auditing attribute
    of IFS objects. Selection may be made on the type of auditing
    including *NONE. DSPIFSAUD assists in understanding what is being
    audited. To specify auditing for an IFS object, use CHGAUD.

DSPIFSAUT

    The Display IFS Authorities command displays or prints the IFS
    authorities from the file created by the CVTIFSAUT TAA command.
    You must first run CVTIFSAUT for the IFS objects that you want to
    analyze. DSPIFSAUT provides a simple query like function including
    selection capability such as by user (including *PUBLIC), by type
    of authority (e.g. *CHANGE), by authorization list, etc.

DSPIFSED

    The Display IFS Entry Description command provides a command to
    display the attributes of an IFS entry. WRKLNK supports an option
    for this, but it is not a command. Additional information is
    provided by DSPIFSED and a print option exists.

DSPIFSOWN

    The Display IFS Owner command displays or lists owned objects in
    the IFS (does not include objects in libraries). The system
    DSPUSRPRF command does not display this information. The QSYLOBJA
    API is used to extract the information.

DSPIPLHST

    The Display IPL History command displays or lists the dates and
    times that an IPL has occurred within a range of dates. The
    inclusion of the normal power down entries is optional as well as
    IPL completion. You must be using the CVTQHST2 tool command to
    first convert the QHST information.

DSPIPLSTS

    The Display IPL Status command displays the information about the
    current IPL status and the settings for the next IPL. An option
    exists to access the TAA Display IPL Attributes command. DSPIPLSTS
    provides a simple review of IPL information.

DSPJOBDLIB

    The Display Job Description Libraries command provides two
    functions for one, generic, or all job descriptions: 1) A simple
    listing of the libraries in each job description 2) A check for
    any non-existent libraries. The output is either displayed or
    listed.

DSPJOBLOG2

    The Display Job Log 2 command displays or prints a job log with or
    without selection criteria. For example, a job log can be
    displayed or printed with one or more specific message IDs,
    generic message IDs, or one or more message types. This provides a
    way to 'net out' a job log to look for specific messages.

DSPJOBLOG3

    The Display Job Log 3 command provides a different method of
    viewing a job log. The messages are displayed on an 80 byte wide
    display using a subfile with one line per message plus a detail
    display option. Different positions within the subfile can be
    quickly displayed along with a scanning capability to find any
    character string.

DSPJOBLOG4

    The Display Job Log 4 command allows a user who has specific *USE
    authority to the TAASPLSEC authorization list to be able to
    display any job log on the system. Program adopt and group adopt
    are not considered valid.

DSPJOBLOG5

    The Display Job Log 5 command provides a different method of
    viewing a job log and attempts to display the last escape message
    (and associated messages) first. The messages are displayed on an
    80 byte wide display using a subfile with one line per message
    plus a detail display option. Different positions within the
    subfile can be quickly displayed along with a scanning capability
    to find any character string.

DSPJOBPERF

    The Display Job Performance command lists job performance
    information for the current job. The RESJOBPERF command (part of
    the JOBINF tool) should first be used to begin capturing the
    information. After some commands are entered, DSPJOBPERF may then
    by used to display the information.

DSPJOBQ

    The Display Job Queue command provides a display that is similar
    to that provided by the system WRKJOBQ command except that only a
    single job queue may be displayed and the user cannot perform
    actions against the jobs. DSPJOBQ may be helpful if you have a
    menu oriented system and want to prevent users from changing,
    holding, or ending jobs on a job queue.

DSPJOBQA

    Display Job Queue Attributes. Provides a method of displaying or
    printing the attributes of a job queue. The current status
    information is also provided.

DSPJOBSCDC

    The Display Job Schedule Calendar command displays the jobs that
    are scheduled to run from the system job scheduler for the next 7
    days (beginning tomorrow). The listing describes the jobs to be
    submitted by date and time. DSPJOBSCDC provides a good review of
    the jobs that will be submitted by the system job schedule
    function.

DSPJOBSCDD

    The Display Job Schedule Description command displays or prints a
    single job schedule entry. The command is usually entered as an
    option from the DSPJOBSCDE subfile, but may also be entered
    directly. The description may be displayed or printed.

DSPJOBSCDE

    The Display Job Schedule Entries command is a 'display only'
    function similar to the system WRKJOBSCDE command. This allows
    making the WRKJOBSCDE command private so that only authorized
    users may make changes while the *PUBLIC user can use DSPJOBSCDE.
    An option exists to display the entries in next job schedule date
    order.

DSPJOBSCDR

    The Display Job Schedule Result command displays the results of
    Job Scheduled jobs (how they completed) for the last submission.
    The JOBACG tool must be in use and the job accounting entries must
    be current for the completed Job Scheduled jobs to obtain
    meaningful results. DSPJOBSCDR assists in understanding what is
    happening to Job Scheduled jobs.

DSPJOBSTRA

    Display Job Start Attributes. Displays the job start attributes
    about any job on the system such as the job queue that was used,
    the subsystem, the time the job was started, the user who
    submitted the job, etc. Depending on the status of the job (on the
    job queue, active, etc.), some of the information is not provided
    by the system to allow it to be displayed.

DSPJOBTYPD

    The Display Job Type Description command displays the codes and
    descriptions of different job types. Both the three character
    codes used on WRKACTJOB and the one character codes used in APIs
    are displayed with the corresponding descriptions.

DSPJOB2

    The Display Job 2 command is a more powerful version of the system
    DSPJOB command. DSPJOB2 supports options for DSPJOB and DSPJOB
    OUTPUT(*PRINT) and all of the detail options available on the
    DSPJOB menu. When the option completes, the subfile is
    re-displayed. DSPJOB2 also allows options for all jobs, all users,
    job status, and job type.

DSPJOB3

    The Display Job 3 command allows a user who has *USE authority to
    the TAAJOBCTL authorization list to perform DSPJOB functions for a
    job that is not his own. This allows trusted individuals (such as
    programmers) to have DSPJOB capability as if they had *JOBCTL
    special authority without directly specifying *JOBCTL in their
    user profile.

DSPJRNA

    The Display Journal Attributes command is similar to the system
    WRKJRNA command. DSPJRNA provides a 'display only' function. No
    Function keys allow a WRK type of command. No journal entries may
    be displayed. DSPJRNA may be useful for operations personnel who
    do not need WRK type functions.

DSPJRNCDE

    The Display Journal Codes command displays the journal codes,
    entry types, and sub types in a window. This can be helpful in
    determining what the codes mean or which code to look for.

DSPJRNOBJC

    The Display Journal Object Counts command displays or lists counts
    of object types that are being journaled to a named journal. This
    includes data base files, members, access paths, data areas, data
    queues, IFS objects, command definitions, libraries, and journal
    receivers.

DSPJRNRCVD

    The Display Journal Receiver Directory command displays or prints
    the list of journal receivers for a specific journal. This is a
    'display only' function that may be safely used by operations
    personnel.

DSPJRNRCV2

    The Display Journal Receiver Attributes 2 command is similar to
    the system DSPJRNRCVA command, but does not provide for an F10 key
    which allows a WRK command. Only attributes of a journal receiver
    are displayed (not the journal entries).

DSPLFMD

    The Display Logical File Member Description command displays or
    prints information about a logical file member. The first based on
    physical file member information is also displayed.

DSPLIBAUT

    The Display Library Authority command provides a listing of one,
    generic, or all objects in a library with the individual
    authorizations to objects. One line is output for each authorized
    user. Selections can be made by different parameters such as
    object type.

DSPLIBJOBD

    The Display Library Job Description command displays or lists one
    or more libraries and job descriptions in one or more libraries
    that contain a specified library name. This allows you to
    determine what libraries are specified within job descriptions.

DSPLIBSIZ

    The Display Library Size command displays or lists a summary of a
    library with size and count information. One, generic, or many
    libraries may be requested to be included. The library object
    record is included in the size and count of objects. An outfile
    may also be requested which contains many additional fields. The
    outfile model file in TAATOOL is TAALIDHP with a format name of
    LIBSIZR.

DSPLIBSRCF

    Display library source files. The command allows you to name a
    library and a spooled file is displayed of the source files in the
    library. The spooled file may also be printed.

DSPLIB2

    The Display Library 2 command displays or lists objects, data
    members, and source members in a named library. Summaries of each
    section are shown. More information is shown than the system
    command DSPLIB, but only a spooled file exists (not an interactive
    display). DSPLIB2 can be helpful when reviewing the contents of a
    library.

DSPLSTJLG

    The Display Last Job Log command displays the last QPJOBLOG file
    for the current user based on the job number. This simplifies
    displaying the job log for programmers and operators when the last
    submitted job fails.

DSPLSTOBJ

    The Display Last Object command displays information about the
    last object name of a generic group of objects. The default is for
    all object types. If the same name exists for different object
    types, the last object type (per system order) determines the
    object that is displayed. If you are naming objects using a
    generic technique, DSPLSTOBJ can assist in providing information
    about the last name assigned.

DSPLSTPWDC

    The Display Last Password Change command lists all or generic
    profiles by the date the password was last changed. Profiles that
    are set to PASSWORD(*NONE) are bypassed. The default is for
    ascending sequence.

DSPLSTSGN

    The Display Last Signon command allows you to sequence user
    profiles by the last signon date/time and select on a range of
    'From date/time' and 'To date/time'. All users or a generic user
    profile name may be entered. This can be used to display users who
    have signed on in the last n hours or have a last signon prior to
    n months ago.

DSPLSTSPLF

    The Display Last Spooled File tool supports three commands -
    DSPLSTSPLJ = Displays the last spooled file of a job, DSPLSTSPLQ =
    Displays the last spooled file in an output queue, and DSPLSTSPLF
    = Provides an option for either of the previous commands. This
    provides a simple means of accessing the spooled information for
    the last function performed.

DSPLSTUSE

    The Display Last Use command displays or prints a listing of one
    line per object in a library identifying the create date, the last
    used date, and the use count. Objects that have never been used
    are always listed. An option exists to list those objects that
    have not been used prior to a specified number of days. DSPLSTUSE
    helps determines what objects may be deleted because of lack of
    use.

DSPMBRCPC

    The Display Member Capacity command displays one line per member
    describing the current number of records and the record capacity.
    Multiple libraries and a generic file name may be used. A
    specified percentage allows a flagging of those members which are
    nearing their record capacity. The command defaults to list only
    those members which are flagged.

DSPMBRD

    The Display Member Description command displays or prints the
    information about a specific member such as the number of records,
    the last date change, the number of increments used, and physical
    file member statistics.

DSPMBRLST

    The Display Member List command is intended for multi-member data
    files. One, generic, or all files in a library may be listed. A
    heading line is printed for each file. One line is printed for
    each member in the file with information such as the create,
    change, and last used dates, number of records, etc.

DSPMBRS

    Display members. Displays a list of members in a data base file
    using a subfile and allows options to display the member
    description and to display the data.

DSPMBRSTAT

    The Display Member Statistics command displays or prints the
    member statistics captured by the CVTMBRD command. The member
    statistics include fields such as the number of reads, updates,
    deletes, access path builds, etc. Different sequences can be
    specified. Member statistics are only kept by the system for
    physical file members.

DSPMLTFMT

    The Display Multi-Format Files command displays or lists Logical
    Files that have either multiple formats or are joined files. The
    dependent files are also listed. One or more libraries may be
    specified with a request for a single, generic, or all files.

DSPMONEY

    Display Money. This is a series of commands to help analyze how
    money will grow at a specific interest rate, what the monthly
    payment of a loan will be etc. The commands are useful for
    evaluating different approaches to the handling of money. The
    commands include growth, loan, present value, level increase,
    annuity, fund, and distribution. A menu is provided to allow easy
    access to all of the commands. Specify GO DSPMONEY.

DSPMONMSG

    The Display Monitor Message command displays the monitorable
    messages associated with a system command. If a translate message
    file exists before QSYS on the library list, it is used to supply
    the message text. Avoids having to look in a manual for the
    information.

DSPMOON

    The Display Moon command displays the dates of the full moon for a
    specific year. The new moon occurs about 14 days earlier than the
    full moon. The 1st quarter moon occurs about 7 days earlier and
    the last quarter moon occurs about 7 days after the full moon.

DSPMSGCNT

    The Display Message Count command displays a list of message
    queues and the number of messages in each. By default, message
    queues without any messages are bypassed.

DSPMSGDAT

    The Display Message Queue by Date command provides a simple
    listing of the messages in a message queue by date and time. This
    provides a review of how old messages are in a message queue.

DSPMSGDTA

    Display Message Data. Displays the 1st and 2nd level text of the
    message and the message data fields including the start position.
    Useful when working with message data to determine which field you
    want and where in the message data it is located.

DSPMSGFA

    The Display Message File Attributes command displays the
    attributes of a Message File. What can be of particular importance
    is to be able to see the CCSID assigned to the file. The value
    determines if a Message Description is converted for an Add or
    Retrieve.

DSPMSGQA

    Display Message Queue Attributes. Provides a method of displaying
    or printing the attributes of a message queue. The current status
    information is also provided.

DSPMSGQINQ

    The Display Message Queue Inquiries command displays or lists
    inquiry messages and their replies from a message queue such as
    QSYSOPR. The formatting allows a better review than the DSPMSG
    command. A detail option for additional information is available.

DSPMSGSID

    The Display Message CCSID command displays the actual CCSID of a
    Message Description. DSPMSGSID is designed as a problem
    determination aid. When a Message File has a CCSID of 65535, the
    CCSID of the Message Description is ignored and 65535 is used
    because no conversion will occur at the time of an ADD/CHGMSGD or
    if the text is retrieved (such as by SNDPGMMSG).

DSPMSGTXT

    Display Message Text. This allows the entry of a system message ID
    and the command uses DSPMSGD to display the message. The command
    determines the message file and library needed based on the
    message ID provided. Useful for help desk operations or
    simplifying the display of any message.

DSPMSGTYP

    The Display Message Type command provides a simple display of the
    codes and descriptions the system uses for the RCVMSG RTNTYPE
    parameter.

DSPMSGUSE

    The Display Message Use command displays the commands that use the
    same monitorable message. Useful in determining which command has
    sent a message when it is not clear.

DSPMSGUSE2

    The Display Message Use 2 command reads the outfile created by the
    SCNEXTMSGF TAA Tool and creates a listing of the message ID and
    the command name that sends the message if it is known. Only
    system commands that send escape messages can be identified.
    Diagnostic messages and messages from APIs cannot be identified.

DSPMSGWDW

    The Display Messages in a Window command allows a message subfile
    to be displayed as a window. The messages in the current program
    message queue are displayed. The command is intended for use in in
    a CL program or executed from a HLL program using QCMDEXC.

DSPMSG2

    Display Message 2 allows several selection criteria to minimize
    the number of messages that would be displayed or listed. For
    example, you can display by message ID, message type, job, user,
    start/end date/time, or the sending program. The DSPMSG2 command
    may be used on any message queue, but would most likely be used
    with QSYSOPR.

DSPNETSVRA

    The Display NetServer Attributes command displays or lists the
    attributes associated with the i5/OS NetServer. This includes both
    the current and pending attributes.

DSPNETSVRS

    The Display Net Server Statistics command displays the current
    NetServer statistics. The RTVNETSVRS command is used internally
    which runs the QZLSOLST API.

DSPNONUSE

    The Display Non Use command command lists objects that have not
    never been used along with size information. This can assist in
    cleanup of the system. Because of the way last used information is
    handled on multi-member data base files, the information may not
    be accurate on multi-member files.

DSPOBJ

    The Display Object command provides various DSPxxx commands for
    most object types. While the command is intended for use as a menu
    option where the object and object type are already known, it may
    be used as a general purpose DSPxxx command. In some cases WRK
    commands are used when no corresponding DSP command exists. Either
    a system or TAA command is used.

DSPOBJAUD

    The Display Object Auditing command displays all audited objects
    in a list of libraries or all libraries. Auditing of an object is
    set by the CHGOBJAUD command. Options exist for selection by
    object type, a list of omitted libraries, and the library type.

DSPOBJDMG

    The Display Object Damage command displays object damage as
    reported by the object list API (QGYOLOBJ). This may not be the
    only damage to an object. If damage is reported, you should
    re-create any such objects.

DSPOBJD2

    The Display Object Description 2 command provides a different
    interface to DSPOBJD information. If multiple objects exist, a
    subfile is displayed which may contain multiple libraries. If a
    single object exists, only the detail display is presented. The
    detail display contains combined information from the various
    DSPOBJD displays. Access to additional object information is
    provided as well as a search pattern.

DSPOBJD3

    The Display Object Description 3 command is like the DSPOBJD
    command outfile support with the exception that a list of omitted
    libraries may be named. This can be helpful when processing a
    special library value such as *LIBL, *USRLIBL, *ALLUSR, or *ALL
    where you do not want certain libraries that would normally be
    included.

DSPOBJD4

    The Display Object Description 4 command is a problem
    determination aid and is similar to DSPOBJD2. DSPOBJD4 allows any
    object description on the system to be displayed if the user
    has *USE authority to the TAADSPOBJ4 authorization list. 'Display
    only' functions for additional object level information are also
    provided for most object types. No data can be displayed.

DSPOBJEXCP

    The Display Object Exceptions command lists one or more objects
    that are saved with storage freed, locked, damaged, or where the
    storage requirement has overflowed the ASP. Multiple libraries may
    be searched.

DSPOBJJRNA

    The Display Object Journal Attributes command displays or prints
    the journal attributes for a physical file, a data area, or a data
    queue. This is the same information that may be seen using DSPOBJD
    and rolling up several screens.

DSPOBJLCK

    The Display Object Locks command is similar to the system
    WRKOBJLCK command except that only display functions exist. This
    is designed for a user who should not be able to change or end
    jobs. The QWCLOBJL API is used.

DSPOBJSIZ

    The Display Object Size command displays or lists objects and
    their sizes. Selection can occur on a generic object name, object
    type, object attribute, and owner. Sequencing can be requested by
    size. DSPOBJSIZ provides a simple review of objects by size.

DSPOBJSRCC

    The Display Object Source Change command lists objects in a named
    library where the change date of the source member that was used
    to create the object is more current than the object create date.
    If the member does not exist, it is flagged. If a program was
    created from modules, the source for the module with the most
    current source change date is used for the comparison.

DSPOBJTYPD

    The Display Object Type Description command displays the valid
    object types on the system in a subfile and allows a detail
    display with a one paragraph description. A print option is also
    available to print a one line listing or a paragraph for each
    object type.

DSPOBJ2

    The Display Object 2 command provides a subfile display of one or
    more objects. The display format is similar to WRKOBJ, but
    supports only a single option 5=Display. This invokes the TAA
    DSPOBJD2 command which provides other display options such as
    DSPOBJAUT and the F8 option which changes based on the object type
    to allow a display of additional details.

DSPONLINE

    The Display Online Information command provides a display of many
    of the online TAA tools such as DSPEDTCDE. Access is also provided
    to the DSPPERTAA menu. The command avoids having to remember the
    individual command names to access online information.

DSPOUTFILE

    The Display Outfile command displays the model files associated
    with commands that provide an outfile. Both system and TAA
    commands are supported. A subfile is displayed which includes the
    model file and format used. An option exists to display the fields
    in the model file.

DSPOUTFMT

    The Display Outfile Format command displays the fields in a format
    of the model file for commands that create outfiles. Many DSP
    commands and CVT commands support an outfile. Both system and TAA
    commands are supported. If multiple outfiles exist for the command
    (eg DSPFD), the DSPOUTFILE command is used to allow a selection.
    DSPOUTFMT may only be used interactively.

DSPOUTQA

    Display Output Queue Attributes. Provides a method of displaying
    or printing the attributes of an output queue. The current status
    information is also provided.

DSPOWNOBJ

    The Display Owned Objects command is similar to the system
    DSPUSRPRF TYPE(*OBJOWN) function, but provides size, last used
    date, and text description also. A summary may also be made by
    either library or object type.

DSPPERTAA

    The Display Personal TAA Commands tool provides a menu of personal
    TAA commands such as DSPMONEY and DSPARACDE. The tool is intended
    for users who want personal as well as business functions.

DSPPGMADP2

    The Display Program Adopt 2 command displays the programs which
    adopt (USRPRF = *OWNER) or those which do not use adopted
    authority from a calling program (ie CHGPGM has been used with
    USEADPAUT = *NO). Both *PGM and *SRVPGM object types are
    supported. The DSPPGMADP2 function operates on a library basis as
    opposed to the system DSPPGMADP command which operates on a user
    profile basis.

DSPPGMSTMT

    The Display Program Statement command is intended as a debugging
    aid when an error has occurred and the MI instruction number is
    known, but the HLL source sequence number is not. By entering the
    program name and the MI instruction number, DSPPGMSTMT displays a
    spooled file with the HLL source sequence number and statement.
    Only CLP and RPG OPM program types are supported. The source for
    the program must exist.

DSPPGM2

    The Display Program 2 command displays or prints information about
    a program by combining information from DSPPGM, RTVOBJD,
    DSPPGMREF, DSPOBJAUT, the entry list parameters, and whether
    programs of the same name exist in any other libraries. Text
    descriptions are displayed for objects and users if they can be
    found. This simplifies searching for information about a program.

DSPPHNINTL

    The Display Phone International command displays one, some, or all
    of the prefixes used for international calls. You may search by
    prefix or country abbreviation (such as POR). Only major cities
    are supported and many cities in English speaking countries.

DSPPMTCMD

    The Display Prompted Command function prompts for a command and
    uses the returned string to 1) run the command via user specified
    QCMDEXC program, 2) parse the returned string into 68 byte blocks
    to be displayed, printed, sent to the job log, or written to a
    source member. Variables may be specified for the parameters of
    the command to be prompted for and will be filled at execution
    time. The variables must be declared in the program.

DSPPRFAUT

    The Display Profile Authorizations command displays one, generic,
    or all profiles and flags those where the *PUBLIC or an authorized
    user has at least *USE rights to the user profile. The
    owner, *ALLOBJ users, and certain system profiles are bypassed.
    The user profiles that are flagged represent a security exposure
    as the *PUBLIC or authorized user can submit a job as the user
    profile or swap to the user profile.

DSPPRTSPC

    Display Print Spacing. Displays spooled output with blank lines
    when extra spacing occurs. Displays skip information. DSPSPLF does
    not show any spacing or skipping information. Useful for
    determining what printed output formatting will look like without
    actually printing.

DSPPTFSAVF

    The Display PTF Save File Summary command provides a summary of
    save files for each release and product ID combination. This
    allows a review of how much space is being taken by PTF save files
    in QGPL.

DSPPWD

    Display Password. Provides a method of displaying a user's
    password. The solution is to use the exit program specified for
    the security password checking program (QPWDVLDPGM system value)
    to capture the new passwords. The passwords are scrambled and
    stored in a data base file.

DSPPWDA

    The Display Password Attributes command displays or prints the
    System Value password attributes. A description of the current
    value is provided on the interactive display along with help text.
    If the user has *SECADM and *ALLOBJ special authorities, a
    Function key allows access to the TAA CHGPWDA command prompt.

DSPPWDINF

    The Display Password Information command displays the information
    for one or more profiles relative to the password and signon
    information. The password itself is not displayed.

DSPPWDLMT

    The Display Password Limit command uses converted data from QHST
    and displays or prints the devices and/or user profiles that have
    been disabled because the QMAXSIGN system value limit has been
    reached. This provides a good review of attempted break-ins or
    users who are having trouble.

DSPPWDLMT2

    The Display Password Limit 2 command uses converted data from QHST
    and displays or prints the conditions where a user profile has
    successfully signed on after one or more invalid password attempts
    to a list of user profiles. This provides a good review of
    authorized users who may be trying to discover a password of
    another profile.

DSPQHST

    The Display QHST command provides a method of searching the data
    from the QHST logs and displays or lists the entries. The QHST
    information must first be converted to a QHST2 file using the
    CVTQHST2 command. DSPQHST provides several search criteria such as
    a date range, a generic job or user name, message ID, and a scan
    value to scan the message text.

DSPQHSTINQ

    The Display QHST Inquiries command displays or lists inquiry
    messages and their replies from the QHST log. The formatting
    allows a better review than the DSPLOG command. A detail option
    for additional information is available.

DSPQHSTSIZ

    The Display QHST Size command provides a simple listing with one
    line per QHSTxx file in QSYS and the total size. The date/time of
    the first and last message of each QHST version is also included
    along with the save date. This allows a review of QHST versions.

DSPQHST2

    Display QHST 2. Provides an alternate method of looking at the
    messages that are sent to QHST. The CVTQHST2 command converts the
    messages to the QHST2 file in a named library. Logical files are
    built over this file to allow the quick access to messages using
    various key values. A subfile is used and the user can access the
    specifics of a message from an option. A MTNQHST2 command is
    provided to remove old messages from the QHST2 file.

DSPQMQRY

    The Display QMQRY command displays either a *QMQRY or *QRYDFN
    object by retrieving basic information about the object and the
    source retrieved by RTVQMQRY. The command may be useful in
    reviewing an existing query.

DSPRCDLCK2

    The Display Record Locks 2 command displays or prints the record
    locks held or waiting for a job. The system DSPRCDLCK command
    displays record locks for a physical file. DSPRCDLCK2 provides a
    simple means of checking in the same or a different job.

DSPRPGCALL

    The Display RPG Call Parameters command displays the fields and
    their attributes that make up the parameter list for one or all
    Calls in RPG source. Externally described data and /COPY functions
    are supported. Useful for determining if the correct parameter
    list is being passed.

DSPRPGCNT

    The Display RPG Count command counts the number of lines of code,
    array data, and comments in a source file. All RPG types are
    supported. A percentage of comments is provided. DSPRPGCNT
    provides a better understanding of the amount of actual source
    versus a count of the number of statements in a source member.

DSPRPGCPY

    The Display RPG /COPY tool provides two commands. DSPRPGCPY
    provides a display or list of the /COPY and/or /INCLUDE statements
    from one or more RPG type source members (including RPGLE, RPGMOD
    etc.) in one or more source files. An outfile is optional which
    will allow further analysis by the DSPRPGCPY2 command which prints
    or lists the use of a specific member named on /COPY or /INCLUDE
    statements. A query may also be written.

DSPRPGFLD

    The Display RPG Fields command displays the fields, their
    attributes and usage defined in an RPG source member. Options
    exist to display in field name order, by type and length, by
    usage, etc. The source may contain up to 1998 field definitions.
    Externally described data and /COPY functions are supported.

DSPRPGHLP

    The Display RPG Help tool provides help text and samples for 1)
    RPG III operation codes and 2) RPG IV operation codes (both fixed
    and free form), Built-in functions, and H/F/D keywords. Help text
    may be displayed when using the Source Entry Utility (SEU) by
    entering 'H' or % in any column of the sequence number or by the
    command DSPRPGHLP.

DSPRPGIGN

    Display RPG IGNDECERR Option. Displays the RPG create command
    parameter IGNDECERR. There is no system support (e.g. DSPPGM) to
    display this value on an existing RPG program. Debug is used to
    display the internal field ZIGNDECD. If it contains a '1',
    IGNDECERR(*YES) was specified.

DSPRPGPARM

    The Display RPG Call Parameters command displays the *ENTRY
    parameters that are used in RPG source. A simple one line per
    parameter listing occurs with the attributes of each parameter.
    Useful for determining if the correct parameter list is being
    passed.

DSPRPGUSE

    The Display RPG Used command provides a method of displaying the
    programs that use an RPG field. The CRTRPGUSE command must be used
    first to create or refresh a data base file. DSPRPGUSE provides an
    indication of whether the program 'uses' or 'changes' each field.
    Both internally and externally defined fields are supported.

DSPRSTDAT

    The Display Restore Date command displays or lists the objects
    that have been restored to a library after the library was
    restored. More than one library or the entire system may be
    reviewed. Options exist to list the new libraries and new objects
    (never restored). DSPRSTDAT assists in understanding what objects
    have been restored or created since the last restore of a library.

DSPSAVSUM

    The Display Save Summary command displays or lists a save summary
    from one or more libraries of where objects are saved to. The
    objects are separated into several categories: 1) Not saved since
    created or changed 2) Saved to a save file or 3) Saved to a tape
    device. Separate summaries appear for each save file used and each
    volume ID (first volume only) used. A detail listing of objects is
    optional.

DSPSAVTAP

    Display Save Tape. Shorthand command to DSPTAP for displaying
    the *SAVRST type labels from a tape. Minimizes keystrokes and need
    to prompt for the DATA parameter to display the Save/Restore
    information. Avoids the typical mistake of forgetting to specify
    DATA(*SAVRST).

DSPSBMJOB

    The Display Submitted Jobs command provides a display that is
    similar to that provided by the system WRKSBMJOB command except
    that the user cannot perform actions against the jobs. An outfile
    is optional. An option exists to allow a display of any spooled
    files associated with the job. DSPSBMJOB may be helpful if you
    have a menu oriented system and want to prevent users from
    changing, holding, or ending batch jobs.

DSPSBS

    The Display Subsystem command provides a display for a single
    subsystem. High level information such as the status and number of
    active jobs are displayed. Up to 3 storage pools assigned to the
    subsystem are displayed and an option allows access to the storage
    pool statistics. Command keys exist to access the jobs that are
    active and the subsystem description.

DSPSBSJBQE

    The Display Subsystem Job Queue Entries command displays the job
    queue entries for one or more subsystems. This allows a review of
    the important entries that control batch work. Selection by a
    specific job queue may be made. An outfile is optional.

DSPSBSJOB

    The Display Subsystem Jobs command provides a display that is
    similar to that provided by the system WRKSBSJOB command except
    that only a single subsystem may be displayed and the user cannot
    perform actions against the jobs. An option exists to allow a
    display of any spooled files associated with the job. DSPSBSJOB
    may be helpful if you have a menu oriented system and want to
    prevent users from changing, holding, or ending active jobs.

DSPSBSJOBQ

    The Display Subsystem Job Queues command provides a display of the
    Job Queues specified for a subsystem and the jobs that are
    currently on the Job Queues. 'Display only' options exist.
    DSPSBSJOBQ provides a review of the batch work that is yet to be
    processed. See WRKSBSJOBQ for a 'work' version.

DSPSCDJOBQ

    The Display Scheduled Job Queue Jobs command displays or lists the
    jobs on one or all job queues that have a scheduled date. A range
    of date and time value may be specified. You must have *ALLOBJ
    special authority to specify *ALL as a library qualifier.

DSPSECRVW

    Display Security Review. Provides a series of options to display
    or print the output from the DSPUSRPRF outfile. Different
    sequencing and selection criteria are available. Useful for
    security reviews in answering such questions as 'Which users
    have *ALLOBJ authority'.

DSPSELOMT

    The Display Select Omit command displays or prints the select/omit
    criteria of a logical file. A better display exists than that used
    by DSPFD TYPE(*SELECT) which makes it more obvious what the
    relationships are. Only single format logical files are supported.

DSPSPCAUT2

    The Display Special Authority 2 command displays the combination
    of special authorities for a user, the group profile, and any
    supplemental group profiles. Selection can be made on the combined
    special authorities. DSPSPCAUT2 helps provide a better view of
    what an individual user can do.

DSPSPLCRTD

    The Display Spool Create Date command displays spooled files for
    one or more output queues in ascending create date sequence.
    Totals occur for each day. An outfile is optional. A beginning
    date may be specified to allow a number of current days to be
    bypassed. DSPSPLCRTD may assist in understanding cleanup
    requirements.

DSPSPLFA

    The Display Spooled File Attributes command displays or prints the
    attributes of a spooled file. The display is similar to the system
    WRKSPLFA display except that no changes can be made. DSPSPLFA is
    useful when a display is needed that does not allow the user to
    change any attributes.

DSPSPLFINF

    The Display Spooled File Information command displays the number
    of spooled files for one or all users. DSPSPLFINF uses the
    RTVSPLFINF command to retrieve the information which uses the
    QSPSPLI API.

DSPSPLF2

    The Display Spooled File 2 command is is intended for users who
    operate from workstations which display 132 column mode. Because
    the font size can be difficult to read, some users may prefer to
    force an 80 wide display. DSPSPLF2 may also be useful on PC
    monitor devices due to the performance of changing the display
    between 80 and 132 mode.

DSPSPLF3

    The Display Spooled File 3 command is similar to the system
    DSPSPLF command, but allows heading information to be omitted on
    and after the first page. This can be helpful when displaying a
    spooled file where the page heading information causes clutter. An
    optional outfile allows you to output a spooled file to a
    'headingless' data base file to allow processing by a program.

DSPSPLF4

    The Display Spooled File 4 command is designed to be used with
    WRKALLSPLF. It allows the spooled file to be displayed and then a
    prompt appears which allows a response of retain, delete, or
    re-display. This allows the user to request to see several spooled
    files and delete those required without returning to the main
    display and attempting to remember what to delete.

DSPSPLF80

    The Display Spooled File 80 command displays a spooled file in an
    80 wide display format even though the display is capable of a
    wider width (such as 132). This provides for a larger font size
    when viewing spooled output. The same windowing, paging, and
    'find' functions as exist for the system DSPSPLF command are
    supported. Blank lines may be excluded (same as DSPSPLF) or
    included.

DSPSPLOWN

    The Display Spooled Files Owner command displays or lists by
    spooled file owner either each owned spooled file or a summary by
    user. This allows a review of how many spooled files and how much
    spooled file storage is owned by users. Specific libraries may be
    named or all libraries.

DSPSPLSIZ

    The Display Spool Size command displays the number of members and
    their size from the QSPL library. The number of members with and
    without data are also displayed. A member may exist that does not
    hold any spooled data as the system tries to limit the number of
    members that must be created.

DSPSPLUSE

    The Display Spooled File Use command displays spooled files from
    one, generic, or all output queues that have not been used in a
    specified number of days. This provides an assist in cleanup where
    users claim they need spooled files kept online. The DLTOLDSPLF
    command may be used to clean up old spooled files that are not
    being used. See the COMPDATE parameter.

DSPSRCCHG

    The Display Source Change command displays the changes to a source
    member between two dates. Both dates default to the last time the
    source member was changed. The default is to display just the
    changes. All statements may be listed with the changes flagged.

DSPSRCLST

    Display Source List. A subfile approach for looking at source
    member level information. The supplied command CPYSRCLST refreshes
    the file used. CPYSRCLST should be run on a regular basis.
    DSPSRCLST allows access by member name or by library/file/member.
    The source member names can be scanned as well as the text when
    attempting to determine a source member name. Provides a faster
    solution than DSPFD member list or PDM.

DSPSRCMBR

    Display Source Member. Provides a display of source whether the
    Application Development Tools (including STRSEU command) are on
    the system or not. If STRSEU does not exist, DSPPFM is used.
    Useful for those situations where code is to run on a different
    system and you don't know if the STRSEU command exists.

DSPSRCMBRS

    The Display Source Members command displays or prints source
    member information from one or more source files with various
    selection criteria. The selection options include source type,
    generic member name, create date, change date, last used date, a
    scan of the member name or text, and the number of existing
    records. DSPSRCMBRS simplifies searching for source member
    information.

DSPSRCMBR2

    The Display Source Member 2 command provides a similar display to
    STRSEU SRCMBR(*SELECT), but only display or print options exist.
    The user cannot delete or edit a member. The display of the source
    may be done using either STRSEU (browse mode) or DSPPFM.

DSPSRCTYP

    The Display Source Type tool displays the standard source types
    used by the system and a text description for each.

DSPSTGPOOL

    The Display Storage Pool command displays or prints the attributes
    and performance statistics of a storage pool. Either a shared pool
    name (such as *BASE) or a system pool ID may be specified. The
    display may be refreshed and the performance statistics reset.

DSPSTGUSE

    The Display Storage Use command displays or lists the amount of
    storage used in descending order by user profile. A percentage
    (default of 90%) may be specified to flag those profiles that are
    approaching the maximum storage allowed per profile. DSPSTGUSE is
    helpful in understanding what users have used versus the maximum
    allowed for each.

DSPSUMJOBQ

    The Display Summary of Job Queue command provides a summary of a
    job queue by Status and Job Priority. One or both of the summaries
    may be listed along with an optional line for each job. DSPSUMJOBQ
    can help determine how many jobs exist for each type.

DSPSUMOUTQ

    The Display Summary of Output Queue command provides a summary of
    an output queue by Status, Form Type, and User Data. One or all of
    the summaries may be listed along with an optional line for each
    spooled file. DSPSUMOUTQ can help determine how much printing must
    occur for each type.

DSPSYS

    Display System. Displays the important characteristics about the
    system such as the name, serial number, model, release ID, disk
    capacity, system ASP percentage used, security level, TAAUPDATE
    date, etc. Useful for those people who signon to multiple systems
    as a refresher.

DSPSYSPTN

    The Display System Partitions command displays information about
    the current system partition and a summary of all system
    partitions.

DSPSYSSEC

    The Display System Security command displays or lists the high
    level information about system security and what the pending
    changes are. The RTVSYSSEC TAA command is used to retrieve the
    information.

DSPSYSVALA

    The Display System Value Attributes command provides a more
    convenient manner of determining the attributes of a system value
    for RTVSYSVAL than the RTVSYSVAL help text. A simple display
    appears with the attributes and the group that the system value
    exists in.

DSPTAACAT

    The Display TAA Categories command displays a subfile of tools in
    a category such as *SPL or *SRC. After you select a tool, a
    display provides options for displaying the member heading
    information and displaying/printing of the tool description.
    Options on DSPTAACAT assist you in finding the correct category.

DSPTAACMD

    Display TAA Commands. The TAA commands are displayed in a subfile.
    Options on the command allow the subfile to be displayed with the
    first value entered (e.g. show all of the commands which begin
    with EDT). A scan capability also exists to show all the commands
    that have a specified string within the command name or the text.
    Useful for determining which command to use when you do not know
    the full command name.

DSPTAADAT

    The Display TAA Integration Date command displays or lists tools
    by integration date. This provides a review of what tools have
    been shipped by date. A 'from' and 'to' date may be specified
    along with a category. A count by year is optional.

DSPTAALIC

    The Display TAA License command provides a simple method of
    reviewing the important characteristics about the license for the
    TAA Productivity Tools and installation information. It also
    provides access to the TAALICENSE and TAACTL data areas.

DSPTAAMBR

    Display a TAA Member. This is a shorthand to SEU browse mode with
    the library defaulting to TAATOOL. It provides a simple keystroke
    method of looking at TAATOOL source.

DSPTAANAM

    The Display TAA Name command allows input of 4 characters for a
    TAA ID such as SRCF and sends a completion message with the tool
    name and description. This can simplify determining what tool is
    being used when only an object name is known.

DSPTAATOOL

    Display TAA Tool. Displays the text information associated with a
    specific TAA tool. The QATTINFO file in TAATOOL must exist. A
    single tool or all of the tools may be printed. Printing all of
    the tools produces a great deal of spooled output.

DSPTAPLBL

    The Display Tape Label command displays or prints basic
    information about a tape label including the date the first file
    was written and the first expiration date. DSPTAPLBL is very
    efficient in displaying information from a virtual tape. The
    command can be very slow when certain tape devices exist.

DSPTAPSIZ

    The Display Tape Size command displays or lists an approximation
    of how much data has been written to a tape. Each file is listed
    along with a total. An outfile is optional. Hardware compression
    is not considered. DSPTAP is used to determine the information.
    Because a spooled file must be read, only lower and upper case
    English is supported.

DSPTAPVOL

    The Display Tape Volume command provides a simple fast method of
    identifying the volume label of a mounted tape. A display appears
    with the name of the volume. Function keys allow either the use of
    DSPTAP or the TAA DSPSAVTAP command.

DSPTBL

    The Display Table command is similar to the display that appears
    using option 5 from the system WRKTBL command to display a *TBL
    object. A listing is optional. The TAA version also shows any
    differences from the base value. For example, if X'04' is output
    as X'37' and not as X'04', ** is used to flag the position.

DSPTIMADJ

    The Display Time Adjustment command displays the information
    regarding a time adjustment. See the TAA command ADJTIM for a
    method of changing the time of day clock forward or backward n
    seconds. DSPTIMADJ displays the information of whether an
    adjustment is being made and if so how much time is needed to
    complete the adjustment. The RTVTIMADJ command is also included
    which uses the QWCRTVTM API.

DSPTIMFMT

    The Display Time Formats command displays the valid time formats
    for data base 'T' type fields. Examples of each TIMFMT option are
    shown. The 'Z' type Timestamp field is also described.

DSPTIMZON

    The Display Time Zone command allows you to display the time
    difference between major cities throughout the world. This
    provides a simple solution for determining the local time in a
    different part of the world.

DSPTIMZONT

    The Display Time Zone Time command displays or lists the date and
    time for a specified time zone. The day of week and offset from
    GMT are also shown. Daylight savings time (DST) is considered if
    the time zone supports DST and the current date/time is within the
    DST start and end date/time.

DSPTMP

    The Display Temperature command provides an interactive display to
    assist in converting from Fahrenheit to Celsius or from Celsius to
    Fahrenheit.

DSPTOOLCMD

    Display Tool Command. Provides a method of displaying the commands
    associated with a tool. A subfile is used to display the commands
    and an option exists to prompt for the command. A function key
    allows access to the tool documentation. If the name entered is
    not a tool but is a TAA command name, the tool name is determined
    and the subfile appears as if requested by the tool name.

DSPTOTPAG

    The Display Total Pages command displays or lists a running total
    of the pages for spooled files in an output queue. The intent of
    the command is to provide an indication for a user of where his
    output is in the queue and how many pages are to be printed before
    a specific spooled file.

DSPTRGSTS

    The Display Trigger Status command displays the trigger status of
    the programs for one or more files in one or more libraries. An
    'escape' parameter exists to allow you to send an escape message
    if one or more programs are disabled or inoperative.

DSPTXT

    The Display Text tool simulates (as best it can) a PC browser
    function on an i5 System. The data to be displayed is passed in an
    array of up to 9,999 elements of 78 bytes each. You must supply a
    program to interface to the Display Text tool. Use the DMODSPTXT
    command for a demonstration.

DSPTXTCNT

    The Display Text Count command is designed for an analysis of TXT
    type members in a source file, but may be used on any source type.
    One, generic, or all members in a source file may be analyzed.
    Total records and blank records are always counted. Up to 5
    comparison groups (such as all the ABC values in a From/To
    location within a source record) may also be compared for an equal
    value or scanned for a value.

DSPUIMCNT

    The Display UIM Count command counts the number of lines in one or
    more members containing UIM type source. Source types in addition
    to PNLGRP may be specified. Comment lines and blank lines are also
    counted. A percentage of comments is provided. DSPUIMCNT provides
    a better understanding of the amount of actual source versus a
    count of the number of statements in a source member.

DSPUNQKEY

    The Display Unique Key command displays the number of unique
    values in the access path fields for a data keyed file (non
    source). The file does not have to have unique keys. The system
    provides the number of unique values for the first 4 key fields of
    a file. This means a count of the unique values for key 1, key
    1-2, key 1-3, and key 1-4. One line is listed for each member. The
    information can provide a better understanding of the data.

DSPUNQKEYT

    The Display Unique Key Totals command displays or lists members in
    one or more data files in a library. The number of unique keys for
    the first 4 keys of each keyed access path are listed. This can
    provide a better understanding of the data that makes up the keys
    of the file.

DSPUSAHST

    The Display USA History command displays information about the
    history of the USA by year. This includes notable events such as
    Presidential elections, significant battles, and other
    information. Some major events outside of the US are also
    included.

DSPUSAPRES

    The Display USA President command displays information about a US
    President including the electoral voting, the Vice President,
    notable cabinet members, and major events that occurred during the
    presidency. By default a list of Presidents will be displayed and
    a selection may be made (F19) or a specific President may be
    entered on the command.

DSPUSRAUD

    The Display User Auditing command displays a list of users and the
    attribute information about object auditing. A single user, a
    generic name, or all users may be requested. You may optionally
    bypass any user who does not have user auditing requested.

DSPUSRAUT

    Display User Authority. Allows for an authorization review by
    combining the authorities from the individual object,
    authorization list, and group profiles. In a complex authorization
    structure, it is difficult to determine who can do what. Provides
    answers to questions such as 'Who can update an object?', 'What
    can USERA do in LIBX?', 'What can the public do in LIBY?'.
    Identifies any private authority that is less than the public
    authority.

DSPUSRAUT2

    The Display User Authority 2 command displays a user's authority
    to objects within a library. Both individual authority, group
    authority (including supplemental groups), and authority
    controlled by authorization lists are described. An individual
    object, a generic name, or all objects can be specified. A
    specific type, or all object types may be requested.

DSPUSRAUT3

    The Display User Authority 3 command displays or lists the
    authorities that have been granted to a specific user for one,
    generic, or all objects. A specific object type may be named.
    Inclusion of the user's owned objects is an option. DSPUSRAUT3
    provides a better review than DSPUSRPRF.

DSPUSRAUT4

    The Display User Authority 4 command lists all objects in a
    library that a named user is not authorized properly to. For
    example, if the user should have *CHANGE authority to all objects
    in the library, a line would be listed for each object where the
    user has 1) no authority 2) is specified as *EXCLUDE, or 3) has
    only *USE authority.

DSPUSRCMD

    The Display User Commands command displays the audit records for
    commands run by a user that is specified with CHGUSRAUD
    AUDLVL(*CMD). DSPUSRCMD is intended for use on critical security
    profiles such as QSECOFR and QSRV to allow a review of the
    commands that were entered. The Journal Code T (Audit) records
    with an Entry Type of CD (command was run) are processed using the
    CPYAUDJRNE outfile.

DSPUSRIDX

    The Display User Index Entries command displays or prints the
    entries in a user index object. Only fixed length keyed user
    indexes are supported up to a 2000 byte maximum entry length. The
    initial display shows one line per entry and allows positioning to
    a key. A detail display is available with an option to display in
    hex.

DSPUSRIDXA

    The Display User Index Attributes command displays or prints the
    attributes of a user index. Any user index may be specified (not
    just those created by the TAA CRTUSRIDX command).

DSPUSRJOB

    The Display User Job command is a display only version of the
    system WRKUSRJOB command. Only display options are valid for a
    job. An option exists to display, work with, or prevent access to
    the spooled files of a job. Any user can display jobs and display
    the details of his own job. Only a user with *JOBCTL special
    authority or with authorization to the TAAJOBCTL authorization
    list can display a job which is not his own.

DSPUSRPRF2

    Display User Profile 2. Provides a simple solution for Assistant
    Security Officers to be able to display any user profile.
    Controlled by the TAADSPUSR2 authorization list. Also found on the
    SECOFR2 tool menu.

DSPUSRSGN

    The Display User Signon command displays the hours and minutes
    that one or more users were signed on. The JOBACG tool is required
    and the latest job information must be converted from the QACGJRN
    journal. The default option lists each signon by a user (from any
    device) with day and user totals for the days requested. You may
    request a day total or just a user total.

DSPUSRSPC

    Display User Space. Displays the contents of a user space. The
    first 400 bytes of the user space are displayed in both character
    and hex. An option exists to display 1200 more. Useful for
    debugging and as an education aid to understand what is in the
    user space.

DSPUSRSPCA

    The Display User Space Attributes command displays or prints the
    attributes of a user space. This includes the internal size, the
    auto-extend option, and the initial value.

DSPUSRSTG

    The Display User Storage command provides a display or listing
    with one line per user of the number of objects owned and the
    total storage used. One, generic, or all users may be requested
    along with an omit list. The number of programs, files, and other
    objects is also shown.

DSPUSRTXT

    The Display User Text command displays a user text description
    based on a user profile name. The command is useful if additional
    information is stored in the text description of the user profile.
    The user of the command does not need to be authorized to the user
    profile. Only the text description is displayed.

DSPVTPRSC

    The Display Virtual Tape Resources command provides a subfile
    display of the virtual tape resources. The command must be entered
    in an interactive environment. To see the virtual tape resources
    that are in use, enter the DSPVTP command.

DSPWHRUSE

    Display Where Used. Provides a method of viewing the output from
    DSPPGMREF in a subfile by referenced object. This allows a simple
    means of displaying an object and determining the using programs.
    An option exists to add *QRYDFN and *QMQRY objects. A detail
    display describes both the object and the using program in more
    detail.

DSPWINDOW

    The Display Window command displays a window over the current
    display. The intent of the command is to provide for a better
    informational display in exception conditions. Ten lines of text
    may be presented plus an error line. The command ends normally if
    the user presses Enter, F3, or F12. A single F key (such as F4 -
    F24) may be defined with user supplied text.

DSPWNDCHL

    The Display Wind Chill command displays a table of 'Wind speed per
    hour' and 'Fahrenheit temperature' (or Celsius) to describe the
    wind chill effect.

DSPWTR

    The Display Writer command is similar to the system WRKWTR
    command, but allows only display options plus describing the
    number of files in the associated output queue. The command is
    intended for end users who need to display information about one
    or more writers, but should not be able to make any changes. An
    optional method of displaying the output queue associated with the
    printer is provided.

DSPWTRSTS

    The Display Writer Status command displays the status of a writer.
    The printer device name must be entered. No change options are
    supported. This allows typical end users to determine the writer
    status without providing options to change.

DTAARAARC

    The Data Area Archive provides online save files for specified
    data areas. Multiple versions may exist for each data area. The
    DTAARAARC tool is not intended to replace normal backup, but
    rather to allow a quick review of a previous value. A typical use
    would be to restore the object to a different library to allow a
    review. You can also restore from the online save files. Several
    commands are provided.

DTAARC

    The Data Archive provides online save files for critical data.
    Multiple version may exist. Options exist for 'save while active'
    and saving dependent logical files. The DTAARC tool is not
    intended to replace normal backup. A typical use would be to
    restore the save file to a different library to review a previous
    value. In an emergency, you can restore from the online save
    files.

DUPALLSPLF

    The Duplicate All Spooled Files command duplicates selected
    spooled files from one output queue to another. The default is to
    duplicate all spooled files. A variety of selection criteria
    exists.

DUPAUT

    The Duplicate Authority command duplicates the authority from one
    object to another. Any existing authorities for the To object are
    removed first. The authorization list and existing authorities are
    made identical. An option exists for who the owner should be and
    his rights to the To object. Program adoption is not considered.

DUPAUTLAUT

    The Duplicate Authorization List Authorities command duplicates
    the authorities from one *AUTL to another. Both *AUTL objects must
    be owned by the same user. All authorities from the To *AUTL are
    removed first and the authorities from the From *AUTL are copied.
    DUPAUTLAUT is helpful when you want to create an *AUTL that is
    similar, but not the same as an existing *AUTL.

DUPCHAR

    The Duplicate Characters command duplicates a string of 1 to 50
    characters to a return variable. An output length must be
    described. The return variable must be 32,000 bytes. DUPCHAR can
    be used as a testing aid or for other unique situations.

DUPCHGOBJ

    The Duplicate Changed Objects command is intended for the case
    where you are maintaining an application on one system and need to
    keep a duplicate of the application up to date on another system.
    DUPCHGOBJ lets you capture the changed objects (including data
    base networks) and places them in a separate library. A tool such
    as MRGOBJ could then be used on the target system to merge in the
    changed objects.

DUPCMDSRC

    The Duplicate Command and Source command allows a command and its
    source to be duplicated from one library to another. This is
    useful when commands and their corresponding source must be
    transferred.

DUPDBN

    Duplicate physical file and dependent logicals. Duplicates one or
    more physical files from one library to another as well as any
    dependent logical files. No data is copied. Useful for changing
    data base definitions by creating the same network in a separate
    library.

DUPDSPFSRC

    The Duplicate Display File and Source command allows a display
    file and its source to be duplicated from one library to another.
    This is useful when display files and their corresponding source
    must be transferred.

DUPFILFMT

    The Duplicate File Format command duplicates a file using the same
    format as a specified file. The new file will not have any keys
    (i.e. it is arrival sequence). A physical or logical (with a
    single format) including a join file may be duplicated.

DUPFILFMT2

    The Duplicate File Format 2 command duplicates a file from a
    physical file to a new file with the same format as the original
    file. The user must have *USE rights to the file being duplicated.
    This differs from CRTDUPOBJ which requires *OBJMGT authority.

DUPJOBSPLF

    The Duplicate Job Spooled File command duplicates the spooled
    files for the current job to a different output queue with a
    different owner. This allows a tool like Spool Archive (SPLARC) to
    back up a job's spooled files even if the owner deletes them when
    the job completes.

DUPMSGD

    Duplicate Message Description. Duplicates a message from a
    specified message file to the same or another file. Useful when
    you want to create a message based on an existing message
    description.

DUPPGMSRC

    The Duplicate Program and Source command allows a program and its
    source to be duplicated from one library to another. This is
    useful when programs and their corresponding source must be
    transferred.

DUPSPLF

    Duplicate Spooled File. Allows a spooled file to be duplicated to
    a different output queue. Uses an API. No restrictions exist. The
    DUPSPLF2 command provides different capability as it does the copy
    using CPYSPLF and CPYF. Useful for making copies of spool files.

DUPSRC

    Duplicate Source Member. Provides a front end to the CPYSRCF
    command to make it easier to duplicate a source member. The
    defaults and special values provide a simpler interface.

DUPSTDSRC

    Duplicate Standard Source. Duplicates skeleton source for the
    typical source types. This simplifies the beginning of a new
    source member as many typically used functions are already coded.
    A text description can be added using the command prompt and will
    also appear as part of the first source record. The standard
    source can be modified for individual requirements.

DUPTAACMD

    Duplicate TAA Commands. Provides a method of duplicating commands
    and other objects from the TAATOOL library to a command library.
    The concept of a command library is described in the information
    member "Library List Requirements" on the HELPTAA menu. The
    companion tool is DLTTAACMD.

DUPTAADBF

    The Duplicate TAA Data Base File command is an internal tool that
    is used to duplicate certain files from TAATOOL when a CVTxxx TAA
    command is used. The command is not intended to be used by users
    except within the CVT programs. The purpose of the tool is to
    allow files in TAATOOL to be *PUBLIC *USE and still allow the file
    to be duplicated. The program adopts QSECOFR authority.

DUPTAPIN

    Duplicate a Tape Using a Single Tape Device. The tape is read in
    by the DUPTAPIN command and written to a data base file. The
    DUPTAPOUT command can then be used to create a duplicate to the
    same device. Multi-volume tapes are supported. A significant
    amount of storage is needed to hold a tape. For example, the
    system distribution tape will require approximately 500 MB of DASD
    storage for V2R3.

DYNMNU

    Dynamic Menu. Provides a method of writing menus where the options
    on the menus are driven from data base records. An option on a
    menu can cause a command or a sub-menu. Many additional functions
    exist such as an optional command line, authorization of options,
    review of current use by user, historical review, and the ability
    to easily turn any menu or option into a Group Job. A
    demonstration program exists.

EDTAUTL2

    The Edit Authorization List 2 command is designed for the case
    where many users exist on an authorization list and it is
    desirable to display the users in name sequence. This is as
    opposed to the system EDTAUTL command which displays the users in
    user profile create date sequence. An exit program may also be
    named to pass any changes to other systems.

EDTDBF

    The Edit Data Base File tool provides a simple means of displaying
    or maintaining a data base. A physical file or a logical file with
    a single format may be processed. The EDTDBF command allows
    records to be displayed, changed, added, or deleted. The DSPDBF2
    command provides a 'display only' function.

EDTDTAARA

    Edit Data Area. Places the current value of the data area into the
    prompt for the CHGDTAARA command. Uses the API QWCRDTAA. Useful
    for any changes to data areas. See also the EDTDTAARA2 tool.

EDTDTAARA2

    Edit Data Area 2. Provides an alternative method of editing the
    existing contents of a data area than the TAA Tool EDTDTAARA.
    EDTDTAARA2 uses a display that is similar to DSPDTAARA where each
    line of 50 bytes is a separate field. EDTDTAARA considers the
    entire data area to be a single field on the display.

EDTDTAARA3

    The Edit Data Area 3 (Hex) command provides an interactive display
    to change the value of a data area in Hex. Both the Hex and EBCDIC
    values are displayed. Only type *CHAR data areas may be specified.
    The command may only be used in an interactive environment.

EDTDTAQ

    The Edit Data Queue command allows editing of character data in a
    non-keyed data queue with a maximum entry length of up to 5000
    bytes. An interactive display is used for editing and updates,
    deletions and new entries may be made.

EDTJOBD

    Edit Job Description. Places the current value of the job
    description into the prompt for the CHGJOBD command instead
    of *SAME. A separate command (EDTJOBDLIB) is provided to edit the
    library list within a job description in a manner similar to the
    EDTLIBL command. The system support of CHGJOBD provides a similar
    function. For the library list function, EDTJOBDLIB may still be
    preferred.

EDTLRGVAR

    The Edit Large Variable command provides editing for a large
    character variable that contains numeric data. Some system
    functions return large character variables that exceed 15 digits
    and place them in *CHAR variables. A *CHAR input value of up to 30
    bytes is supported. The return CHROUT value must be declared
    as *CHAR LEN(43).

EDTNETA

    Edit Network Attributes. Places the current value of a specified
    network attribute into the CHGNETA command prompt instead
    of *SAME. Useful for changing network attributes.

EDTOBJAUT2

    The Edit Object Authority 2 command is similar to the system
    supplied EDTOBJAUT command except that the names appear in
    alphabetical sequence following the owner and *PUBLIC user. A
    'position to' option exists. An option exists to capture the
    GRT/RVK changes so they may be logged or sent to another system.

EDTSRC

    The Edit Source tool is a subset of an SEU (PDM) like function.
    The intent of the tool is to provide a simple source editor for a
    system that does not have the STRSEU command or a similar
    function. This would be typical in some remote or small
    installations. Any source may be edited, but prompting exists only
    for CLP, CLLE, and CMD type source.

EDTUSRPRF

    Edit User Profile. Similar to CHGUSRPRF in that it allows changing
    of an existing profile using the current values displayed in the
    CHGUSRPRF prompt. EDTUSRPRF provides a simple method of capturing
    the executed CHGUSRPRF command in a journal. The journal or
    journal entry can be sent to another system and the same command
    executed there. Useful for keeping multiple systems in synch when
    making user profile changes.

EDTUSRSPC

    The Edit User Space command allows data to be written or changed
    in a user space. An option on the command allows editing in
    character or hex mode. EDTUSRSPC provides a convenient method of
    storing and maintaining data in a user space object or making
    changes when data is written to a user space by another function.

EDTVAR

    Edit Variable. Allows a decimal CL variable to be edited into a
    character field. Useful for converting decimal values into a form
    that is meaningful for messages. The command strips off leading
    zeros and inserts an optional decimal point. Most RPG edit codes
    may be specified. Useful for CL applications which need to convert
    packed decimal values into readable values.

EDTVAR2

    The Edit Variable 2 command is an enhanced version of the existing
    EDTVAR tool. The EDTVAR2 command provides more Edit Codes and
    options. EDTVAR2 may be used as 1) A command in a CL program, 2) A
    sub program that can be called, or 3) A subroutine within an RPG
    program. A maximum of 15 digits is provided for. A testing command
    (DMOEDTVAR2) is provided.

EDTVAR3

    The Edit Variable 3 tool is like EDTVAR2, but allows editing of up
    to 30 digits. EDTVAR3 may be used as 1) A sub program that can be
    called, or 2) A subroutine within an RPG program. A testing
    command (DMOEDTVAR3) is provided.

ENAGRPPRF

    The Enable Group Profile command ensures that all members of a
    group profile are enabled. The companion command is Disable Group
    Profile which ensures that all members of a group profile are
    disabled. An option exists to determine if the users who are part
    of a supplemental group profile should be enabled/disabled. No
    change to the status of the named group profile occurs.

ENAUSRPRF

    Enable User Profile. A user profile is normally disabled by
    exceeding the number of password attempts and the setting of the
    QMAXSGNACN system value. ENAUSRPRF changes the profile back to an
    enabled state. The command adopts the security officers authority
    and is intended for use by trusted personnel. The user of the
    command must be authorized to the TAAENAUSR authorization list.

ENDACTJOB

    The End Active Job command ends jobs for a specific job name, a
    user name, or both. All batch and interactive jobs would be ended.
    Jobs on the job queue would not be ended.

ENDDSCJOB

    The End Disconnected Job command checks for jobs in the DSC
    (disconnected) state and ends them by default. This allows a
    simple cleanup solution prior to a backup. An option exists to
    just list those jobs that are in the disconnected state.

ENDDUPJOB

    End Duplicate Jobs. Allows all jobs to be ended even if duplicate
    names exist. ENDJOB supports the ADLINTJOBS parameter to allow the
    ending of all interactive jobs. ENDDUPJOB will end both
    interactive and batch jobs.

ENDINTJOB

    The End Interactive Jobs command ends all interactive jobs except
    the current job and those found on omit lists of devices and users
    (see the Omit list discussion). Selection by subsystem and generic
    user can be made. The command may be used in conjunction with the
    SNDINTMSG command which can inform users a few minutes before
    ending their jobs.

ENDJOBWOL

    The End Jobs With Object Locks command ends all batch and
    interactive jobs holding locks on a specified object.

ENDJOB2

    The End Job 2 command provides for ending multiple jobs such as
    generic job names, generic user names, etc. The parameters of the
    command (such as OPTION and DELAY) are passed to individual ENDJOB
    commands for active jobs that meet the selection criteria. You
    must have *JOBCTL special authority to use ENDJOB2.

ENDOLDJBQJ

    The End Old Job Queue Jobs command ends jobs which are on one or
    all job queues based on a specified number of retention days. Jobs
    that have a schedule date are bypassed. An Action parameter exists
    that allows a determination of the jobs that would be ended if
    ACTION(*END) had been specified.

ENDSBSJOB

    The End Subsystem Job command ends one or more jobs from one or
    all subsystems based on a number of minutes active. For example,
    you can end all jobs in a subsystem that have been active for more
    than 640 minutes (8 hours).

ENDSBS2

    The End Subsystem 2 command is similar to the system ENDSBS
    command except ENDSBS2 does not complete until the subsystem has
    reached an inactive state. Wait time options may be specified.
    ENDSBS2 simplifies writing a CL program that ensures a subsystem
    has ended properly.

ENDSBS3

    The End Subsystem 3 command will quiesce a system, but not take
    the system completely to restricted state. All subsystems will be
    ended, except QCMN, QHTTPSVR, QSERVER, QSPL, QSYSWRK, QUSRWRK,
    TAAUPSMON, the controlling subsystem, and those specified in the
    OMIT parameter.

ENDTAALIC

    End TAA License. Provides a method of terminating the license to
    the TAA Productivity Tools by placing an expiration date of 90
    days from the current date in the TAALICENSE data area. Useful for
    the case where the license is being terminated or the license is
    being transferred to a different serial number.

EXCCMD

    Execute Commands from a Source Member. Allows an inline execution
    of commands instead of submitting a job to batch. Useful when you
    have entered several commands interactively and then want to
    execute them again. You would achieve this by using the TAA tool
    CPYJOBLOG command to copy the commands to a source member and then
    use EXCCMD.

EXCCMDCHK

    Execute Command Check. Provides a method of allowing a command to
    be entered by a user (with optional prompting) and returns the
    string to be executed with keywords included. Like QCMDCHK except
    that keywords are added to the string. Intended for use in an
    application where the command will be stored in a data base and
    executed at a later time.

EXCJOBCTL

    The Execute using *JOBCTL command is intended for the situation
    where the user needs *JOBCTL authority, but should not be
    permanently authorized. Specific TAA functions are supported and
    the Security Officer may authorize other commands. The user must
    be authorized to the TAAJOBCTL authorization list.

EXCOUTPUT

    The Execute OUTPUT parameter command is designed for use by user
    written DSP commands which support a standard OUTPUT parameter
    (defaults to * and allows *PRINT). EXCOUTPUT provides either
    DSPSPLF or RLSSPLF depending on the job type and the value of the
    OUTPUT parameter.

EXCSRC

    Execute Source. Executes source in a source member based on a
    label identification on a source statement. Generally used for
    object creation where the CRT function requires specific
    parameters or multiple commands. Allows variable substitution for
    such functions as the source file, the source file library, the
    object library, etc. Can be executed from PDM with a user defined
    option. Useful for consistent object creation.

EXPFIL

    The Expire File tool is a series of commands that allow you to set
    an expiration date for a file of any type. The system supports an
    expiration date for members, but not for files. You must
    have *ALLOBJ authority to use any of the commands in the EXPFIL
    tool.

EXPVAL

    Expand Value. Provides a solution for the situation where a RTV
    command returns a list of values in a single variable that may not
    have a space between the values and you want to use the list in
    QCMDEXC.

EXPVOLID

    Expand Volume ID. Takes a four character volume ID (e.g. ABCD) and
    expands it to 50 volume ID names (e.g. ABCD01, ABCD02 ... ABCD50).
    Useful for save/restore operations to assist the operator in
    mounting the correct volumes in sequence. The save/restore
    function will require the tapes to be mounted according to the
    volume ID list, but will not require the full list to be mounted.
    Must execute thru QCMDEXC.

EXTCMD

    Extract Command. Extracts a command and the command library (if
    any) from a string. Useful for determining which command was
    entered when the user enters a command in a string form. The
    string could be entered interactively or it could be passed by a
    program which is reading source.

EXTLST

    Extract List. Extracts an entry from a list passed from a command
    parameter. Useful for creating commands which allow lists for
    parameters. Simplifies the coding in the command processing
    routine.

EXTLST2

    The Extract List 2 command is intended for the case where a CL
    program is the CPP for a command which uses a list and the list
    must be passed to another command or to a HLL program. Because of
    the way the list is passed by command processing, garbage may
    appear in the positions where the user did not enter a value.
    EXTLST2 cleans up the list so it may be passed on.

EXTLST3

    The Extract List 3 command accepts input from a simple list
    parameter passed from a command and returns a value that is
    suitable to be moved to a variable for listing or displaying in a
    message. One space would exist between each value returned. The
    command would typically be part of a CPP that needs to make the
    list displayable and not as it is passed to the program.

EXTQLFJOB

    The Extract Qualified Job Name command accepts an input value such
    as '123456/USERA/JOB1' and returns separate variables for JOB,
    USER, and JOBNBR. If your program is attempting to parse a message
    containing a qualified job name, EXTQLFJOB may be helpful.

EXTQLFNAM

    The Extract Qualified Name command extracts an object and optional
    library qualifier from a string such as 'ABC/DEF' where ABC is
    considered to be the library and DEF the object. Leading blanks
    and apostrophes are ignored. Any characters following the end of
    the object name (after the blank delimiter) are ignored.

EXTVAL

    The Extract Value command extracts the value from a character
    variable. If the value is surrounded by quotes, the quotes are
    removed. The command may be helpful when dealing with spooled
    printed values.

FAVCMD

    The Favorite Command tool provides a simple method of executing
    your favorite commands. Your favorite commands would be placed in
    a data base file by either a Work function or an Add command. The
    Add command extracts the previous command from the current program
    message queue. A unique name must be assigned to each favorite
    command. A favorite command is then executed by either a special
    command or from a display.

FILEFDBCK

    File Feedback Definition. Provides data structure definitions for
    the RPG file feedback area. Can also be used by other HLLs. Useful
    for dealing with the file feedback area as it provides standard
    definitions and avoids errors when adding offsets.

FIND

    Find Generic Objects. Finds all generic objects in the current
    library or first library on library list with minimal keystrokes.
    Front end to WRKOBJ, but faster for accessing a normal request.

FIND2

    The Find 2 command is intended to assist you in identifying all
    the objects of a generic name on the library list, in a specific
    library, all libraries, etc. Messages are returned when an object
    is found.

FIXALLSRC

    The Fix All Source command provides a method of making mass
    changes to member data in a source file based on a 'From value'
    found in the source. Any type of source is valid to be changed.
    Because ACTION(*CHECK) is the default, no changes will be made
    allowing a review of what would be made by ACTION(*CHANGE).

FIXCLENDDO

    The Fix CL ENDDO command adds a comment to the ENDDO commands in
    CL source that matches the expression such as (&A *EQ &B) of the
    corresponding IF command. MONMSG commands with EXEC(DO) are
    handled in a similar manner with the message ID added as a comment
    to the corresponding ENDDO. One, generic, or all CL and CLLE
    source members in a source file may be specified.

FIXCLPSRC

    Fix CLP Source. Provides a method of adding keywords to CLP, CLLE,
    or CMD type source using a command. The result is similar to if
    you had used the prompter in SEU on every command. The command
    also provides a solution of converting source from one size source
    file (e.g. 92 bytes) to a larger size and utilizing the extra
    length.

FIXDBFFLD

    The Fix Data Base Field changes a character field (or an entire
    record) in a member to trim leading blanks, remove specified
    characters, and translate characters. A single field may be used
    for selection. FIXDBFFLD may be useful when data is received from
    another system that contains unwanted characters.

FIXDECERR

    The Fix Decimal Errors command fixes packed and/or zoned fields in
    an externally described file member. Packed fields are set to
    zeros if invalid decimal data exists. Zoned fields with invalid
    characters have the characters made valid. Use the VALDBF tool to
    check for decimal errors (does not change values).

FIXHLPRCD

    Fix Help Record. Modifies the DDS source associated with the
    DMOSUBF tool to allow the help formats to be moved to a different
    file.

FIXMINRLS

    The Fix Minimum Release command finds objects that were created
    with a target release earlier than the one specified on the
    command and replaces the object for most cases. *PGM, *MODULE,
    and *SRVPGM objects are checked. *MODULE and single module *PGM
    objects are replaced. Objects with creation data may be bypassed.
    All *SQLPKG objects are flagged. The tool is designed to assist in
    conversion to V6R1M0.

FIXQLFCPP

    The Fix Qualified CPP command is intended to library qualify the
    programs that are called from the command definition object of
    user written commands. This is an important consideration if you
    write programs that adopt (USRPRF = *OWNER). A command definition
    object (*CMD) describes the CPP and its library. If the CPP
    uses *LIBL or *CURLIB,

FIXQLFNAM

    The Fix Qualified Name command allows you to add a library
    qualifier to non-system commands (and optionally to system
    commands) used within CL source. The source is updated to include
    the library that the command is found in. The source is
    reformatted in a manner similar to if you had prompted for every
    command in SEU. The library of the command must be on the library
    list and the first occurrence is used.

FIXRPGEND

    Fix RPG END Operation Codes. An RPG member or all RPG members in a
    file can be read to determine if any END statements should be
    changed to the appropriate ENDIF, ENDDO, ENDSL, etc. The default
    is to change the statements. An option exists to check the source
    only. Useful for cleaning up source to use the more explicit END
    operation codes.

FIXSRCDAT

    The Fix Source Date command checks for invalid dates in the SRCDAT
    field of source members. Only the YYMMDD format should exist. A
    single member, generic members, or all members can be checked in
    one or all files in a library. A listing occurs of any invalid
    dates. An update option exists to to change the dates to valid
    dates.

FIXSRCSEQ

    The Fix Source Sequence Numbers command searches for invalid
    decimal data in the sequence number positions (1-6) of source
    statements. The default prints a report of any statements that
    have invalid decimal data. An option allows updating to create
    valid sequence numbers.

FIXVAR

    The Fix Variable command allows an input variable to be changed by
    replacing a character with one or more characters (up to 10) or
    deleting a character. The new value is returned in a 5000 byte
    variable. The input variable may be up to 5000 bytes, but a length
    should be specified to improve performance.

FMTLIN

    Format line. Provides a solution for formatting a string of text
    so that a word is never split over a line and excess blanks are
    squeezed out. A return variable provides the formatted text.
    Special formatting options allow control over when a new line
    occurs, line indentation, and blank spaces within a line.

FMTOPT

    The Format Options tool provides an assist when several lines are
    required to describe options or command keys in a typical subfile
    application. For example, on the WRKMBRPDM display there are two
    lines for option descriptions and two lines for command key
    descriptions. However, there are more options and command keys
    than fit in two lines. Generating the proper display lines is
    simplified by the use of FMTOPT.

FMTQLFCMD

    The Format Qualified Command command allows CL source to be
    formatted so any qualified commands begin in position 14 of the
    source with the command name. The / is placed in position 13 and
    the library name to the left. This aligns the command names for
    easier reading of the source. The command prompter formats a
    qualified name so the library name begins in position 14.

FNDCMD

    The Find Command command displays a list of commands that match a
    string such as 'JOBD'. By default all commands from QSYS and
    TAATOOL are displayed that match the string. When the display
    appears, options exist to prompt for the command or use the TAA
    DSPOBJD2 command. A separate command CRTFNDCMD may be used to
    build the file of commands for all or named libraries.

FNDCMDTXT

    The Find Command Text command displays or prints a list of
    commands that match a string somewhere in the text description of
    command objects such as 'printer'. A file of commands is created
    by the TAA install process (using the FNDCMD tool) which contains
    all commands on the system except for duplicates in QSYS and the
    previous release libraries.

FNDJOB

    The Find Job command provides an interactive display of jobs by
    entering job/user/status values. The job and user names may be
    generic and may contain wildcards. Options exist on the display
    for further information or for actions such as ENDJOB if
    authorized. FNDJOB simplifies finding a job when only part of the
    job name or user name is known.

FNDMSGID

    Find Message ID finds the message file(s) that hold a message ID.
    This is very useful when handling jobs which list a message id
    with and unknown message file. The product issuing the message can
    often be identified this way.

FNDOBJMBR

    The Find Object Member command attempts to match the source member
    name used to create an object with a source member in one or more
    source files. This is designed for the case where the source has
    been moved or duplicates exist for the same member name. One or
    more objects may be specified with one or more libraries checked
    for where the source may exist.

FNDOBJNAM

    The Find Object Name command searches for an object name, a
    generic object name, or a string of characters in a object name. A
    single object type or all object types may be searched. A single
    library, multiple libraries, or all libraries may be searched.
    Either messages are sent or a spooled file is output.

FNDOBJTXT

    The Find Object Text command searches for a string of characters
    in the object descriptions in a single library, multiple
    libraries, or all libraries. Either messages are sent or a spooled
    file is output. The intent of FNDOBJTXT is to assist you when you
    cannot remember the object name, but you do remember some string
    of characters in the object text.

FNDRNMRSTF

    The Find Renamed Restore File command outputs a spooled file for
    any files found that have a name ending in 4 digits. This
    typically occurs if a file has been saved, the format of the file
    has been changed, and you have requested a restore of the original
    object with ALWOBJDIF(*ALL). One or more libraries may be
    searched. FNDRNMRSTF can assist you in cleaning up your system.

FNDRNMRSTM

    The Find Renamed Restore Members command outputs a spooled file
    for any members found that have a name ending in 4 digits. This
    typically occurs if a member has been saved, deleted, re-created
    with the same name, and then restored. One or more libraries may
    be searched. FNDRNMRSTM can assist you in cleaning up your system.

FNDSPLF

    The Find Spooled File command can assist when you are trying to
    find a spooled file, but you are not sure of the name, the job,
    the form type, etc. FNDSPLF allows you to identify one, generic,
    or all output queues that should be searched for whatever
    information you have such as the form type or some string of
    characters within the form type. Most of the selection options
    supported by FNDSPLF allow this type of searching.

FNDSRCMBR

    The Find Source Member command searches for a member name, a
    generic member name, or a string of characters in a member name. A
    single source file or all source files in a single library,
    multiple libraries, or all libraries may be searched. Either
    messages are sent or a spooled file is output. FNDSRCMBR assist
    when you cannot remember the full member name or where it exists.

FNDSRCTXT

    The Find Source Text command searches for a string of characters
    in the text description of source members. A single source file or
    all source files in a single library, multiple libraries, or all
    libraries may be searched. Either messages are sent or a spooled
    file is output. The intent of FNDSRCTXT is to assist you when you
    cannot remember the source member name, but you do remember some
    string of characters in the member text description.

FNDUSRATR

    The Find User Attribute command finds objects that have a named
    user attribute or any user attribute. A listing is displayed or
    output. User attributes allow a further identification of objects.

FNDWRD

    The Find Word command lets you find an English word beginning or
    ending with the letters you specify or you may scan for all words
    containing the value that was entered. Wildcards ('_') may also be
    used. An option exists to include proper names such as 'John' and
    place names such as 'Johnstown'. The supplied dictionary that is
    searched has about 80,000 words and names. FNDWRD is helpful when
    you do not know how to spell a word or name.

FRCOBJSTG

    The Force Object Storage command forces an object in the *USER
    domain to non-volatile storage. Only the object
    types *USRIDX, *USRQ, and *USRSPC may be specified and the object
    must be in the *USER domain. Without forcing the object to
    non-volatile storage (disk), a system failure could cause the
    object on disk to contain the value prior to your change.

FREE

    Free a Program from within a CL program. Useful for freeing RPG
    programs that were activated and are no longer needed. More
    granular than RCLRSC.

FTP2

    The FTP2 (Start TCP/IP File Transfer) command allows the use of
    FTP without entering the FTP subcommands. The subcommands are
    generated internally and used to send a file to a remote system. A
    log of FTP subcommands, errors, and information is kept to allow
    error reporting.

GENPRMNBR

    The Generate Prime Numbers command writes one record per prime
    number to the PRIMEP file. Each number is 7 digits in a packed
    field named PRIME. A range of prime numbers may be generated from
    2 to 9,999,999. Prime numbers may be helpful in different
    applications. The algorithm used is a modified Sieve of
    Eratosthenes. The model outfile is TAANBREP with a format name of
    PRIMER.

GENRANNBR

    Generate a Random Number. Useful for creating test data,
    simulations, games or achieving a relative record number.

GENRANPWD

    The Generate Random Password command generates a random password
    of a specified length from 5 to 100 bytes. Options exist to allow
    digits, allow vowels (AEIOUY), and allow lower case. No adjacent
    characters will ever be the same. The first character is always an
    upper case letter A-Z that is not a vowel. The second character is
    always a digit if digits are allowed.

GENRANPWD2

    The Generate Random Password 2 command generates a random password
    according to the system password rules which are set. This tool is
    available only on IBM i 7.2 and later.

GENUNQNBR

    The Generate Unique Number tool generates unique numbers within a
    specified range. The GENUNQNBR command is intended for CL program
    use and generates a single unique number each time the command is
    used. The GENUNQNBR2 command creates an outfile of unique numbers.
    The outfile name is always UNQNBRP which uses the model file
    TAANBRDP with a format name of UNQNBRR.

GNLDBF

    The General Data Base File tool provides a simple ready to use
    data base with standard fields. The tool is intended for
    applications where a simple internal data base file is needed for
    the application and actions must occur from a CL Program. The tool
    is designed for low use activity.

GRTAUTMSGQ

    The Grant Authority to Message Queue command is intended to
    prevent the *PUBLIC user from displaying and answering messages in
    a message queue such as QSYSOPR. The command sets the *PUBLIC
    authority to allow sending of messages, but prevents the use of
    DSPMSG to the message queue. A named user may be specified who
    will be able to both send messages and use DSPMSG.

GRTOWNOBJ

    Grant Owned Objects. Grants authority to a user for all of the
    objects owned by a different user. No QDOC documents are granted
    to. A companion command (RVKOWNOBJ) performs the revoke function.
    A spooled file lists all the changes.

GRTUSGAUT

    The Grant User Group Authority command allows you to grant the
    same authority to all users of a User Group (as defined by the
    User Group tool). The companion command is RVKUSGAUT which revokes
    authorities to an object for users of a User Group. These commands
    can be helpful when groups of users are needed, but the system
    Group Profile support cannot be used or is undesirable to use.

HASH

    The Hash Two Fields command provides for two fields to be input
    and returns a 10 byte hash value. The typical use of the function
    is when a non-secure program exists that needs to be passed data
    and you want to prevent the misuse of the program.

HELPTAA

    Help TAA Menu. HELPTAA is both a command and a menu (access via GO
    HELPTAA). The menu provides both information members about the TAA
    Productivity tools (e.g. Overview, Security, Libraries used, and
    typical commands to assist you in finding the right tool and
    understanding it (e.g. DSPTAACAT, PRTTAACAT, DSPTAACMD, WRKTAA,
    DSPTAA).

HLDALLJOBQ

    The Hold All Job Queues command holds all job queues in one or
    more libraries using generated HLDJOBQ system commands. A single
    job queue name, a generic name, or all job queues may be held. An
    ACTION parameter allows either *CHECK or *HOLD. HLDALLJOBQ can
    assist when a full or partial shutdown of the system is needed.
    You must have both *ALLOBJ and *JOBCTL special authority to use
    HLDALLJOBQ. See the companion tool RLSALLJOBQ.

HLDALLOUTQ

    The Hold All Output Queues command holds all output queues in one
    or more libraries using generated HLDOUTQ system commands. A
    single output queue name, a generic name, or all output queues may
    be held. An ACTION parameter allows either *CHECK or *HOLD.
    HLDALLOUTQ can assist when a full or partial shutdown of the
    system is needed. You must have both *ALLOBJ and *JOBCTL special
    authority to use HLDALLOUTQ. See the companion tool RLSALLOUTQ.

HLDALLWTR

    The Hold All Writers command holds all writers by using generated
    HLDWTR system commands. A single writer, a generic name, or all
    writers may be held. An ACTION parameter allows either *CHECK
    or *HOLD. HLDALLWTR can assist when a full or partial shutdown of
    the system is needed. You must have *JOBCTL special authority to
    use HLDALLWTR. See the companion tool RLSALLWTR.

HLDJOBUNTL

    The Hold Job Until command allows you to release a held job at a
    specific time. You can either use HLDJOB to hold the job or submit
    the job with HOLD specified. The job being held cannot be an
    interactive job. You can release the job either in the current day
    or the next day. HLDJOBUNTL may be helpful when you want to hold a
    job for a period of time and avoids having to remember to release
    the job.

HLDJOB2

    The Hold Job 2 command holds one or more jobs using the system
    HLDJOB command. Generic job names or user names may be specified
    along with a subsystem name. An ACTION parameter allows
    either *CHECK or *HOLD. HLDJOB2 can assist when a set of jobs
    needs to be held. You must have *JOBCTL special authority to use
    HLDJOB2.

HLRMVMSG

    High Level Language Remove Message. Provides a program to call
    (HLRMVMSG which has no parameters) from a HLL to allow removal of
    all the messages received to the HLLs program message queue.
    Allows cleanup of the job log for HLL program message queues.

HORSERACE

    The Horse Race tool provides the ultimate method of choosing who
    should buy coffee. Up to 7 horses may run in each race. The race
    lasts less than a minute.

IFSLST

    The IFS List tool provides commands to create a list of IFS
    Directories that may be used with the CVTIFS OBJ(*IFSLST) and
    CAPSYSINF IFS(*IFSLST) functions. This provides a specific set of
    directory names that will be converted. This allows you to
    minimize the time it takes to do CVTIFS or CAPSYSINF to the IFS
    directories you are interested in.

INDCLPDO

    The Indent CLP Source command provides for a method of indenting
    CLP source DO groups within a source member. The DO command may
    appear by itself or be embedded in an IF, MONMSG, or ELSE command.
    This can simplify viewing CL source as the DO groups clearly
    standout.

INZPWD

    The Initialize Password tool is designed for Assistant Security
    Officers to be able to reset a users password. The typical case
    for this would be where the user has forgotten his password. The
    INZPWD command allows the new password to be either the user
    profile name or a random value. The INZPWD2 and INZPWD3 commands
    force a random value. Either command forces the user to change the
    password at signon.

JLGCTL

    Job Log control. Provides a method of capturing job log
    information and placing it in data base files. A sub file display
    allows the job log data to be found by using one of several access
    paths. The job log data can be displayed online or printed with
    options to reduce the amount of printing.

JOBACG

    The Job Accounting tool is a series of commands that let you work
    with the job accounting entries from the QACGJRN journal. You may
    either display the entries using several different access paths or
    print the entries using different selection and sequencing
    criteria. Job accounting entries from multiple systems may be
    stored in the same data base.

JOBACT

    The Job Active tool provides a periodic check for critical jobs
    that are designed to be active at all times. If one of these jobs
    is not active, a message may be sent to QSYSMSG (QSYSOPR is used
    if QSYSMSG does not exist) or a command may be run.

JOBANZ

    The Job Analysis tool submits a never ending batch job to capture
    WRKACTJOB information at specified intervals. Options exist such
    as sending a message if a job has used more than a specified
    amount of CPU percentage during an interval. The JOBANZ tool can
    assist in determining which jobs and conditions are causing a
    slowdown in system performance.

JOBDEP

    The Job Dependent tool provides a series of commands that allow a
    Master Job to be defined with Dependent Jobs. Each Dependent Job
    can be defined to have dependencies such as the successful
    completion or failure of another Dependent Job, a switch setting,
    or if an object exists. At various points, the Dependent Jobs are
    tested to determine if their dependencies are met and if so, a
    Dependent Job is submitted to batch.

JOBDEP2

    Describes a demonstration for the JOBDEP tool.

JOBINF

    The Job Information tool provides commands that allow you to
    create a record when a job begins and ends. The information that
    is captured includes how and when the job started and a summary of
    performance information when the job ended. The STRJOBINF and
    ENDJOBINF commands must be included in the job.

JOBSCH

    Job Scheduling. Provides a method of storing SBMJOB commands in a
    file with a group name (e.g. MONDAY, TUESDAY, MONTHEND) and allows
    a simple method of submitting an entire group. Useful for
    simplifying system operator tasks for submitting standard batch
    work.

JOBTALK

    The Job Talk tool allows a means of interrupting a job to execute
    a command entered from another job. The job to be interrupted must
    set a message queue to Break Mode and use a supplied Break
    Handling program. The technique allows an authorized user to
    display the contents of objects that cannot ordinarily be seen
    such as *LDA, *GDA, and objects in QTEMP. The same technique may
    also be used to assist in recovery.

LCK1STRCD

    Lock First Record in a Data Base File. This is a testing aid which
    will lock the first record in a keyed or arrival sequence access
    path. A program in a second job can be tested for how it handles a
    locked record condition. Useful for testing.

LIBGRP

    Library groups. Allows a series of library groups where each group
    is one or more libraries. The CHGLIBGRP command allows the user
    portion of the library list to be set by naming a list of library
    groups. ADDLIBGRP and RMVLIBGRP are also supported. Useful for
    changing library lists without changing programs and for simple
    list switching when the maximum number of allowed libraries (25)
    is being approached.

LMTDLTSPLF

    Limit DLTSPLF. Provides a solution that prevents users
    without *JOBCTL special authority from deleting a spooled file by
    using a validity checking program. The commands DLTSPLF and
    CLROUTQ can be limited. The CHGSPLFA OUTQ parameter can also be
    limited. An option exists to limit to *SPLCTL special authority
    instead of *JOBCTL.

LMTDLTSPL2

    Limit DLTSPLF 2. The same as LMTDLTSPLF for DLTSPLF except that
    more granular control may be used to specify what can occur by
    spooled file name. For example, deleting a QPJOBLOG spooled file
    can be limited to *JOBCTL or *SPLCTL users or by an authorization
    list.

LNGMSGF

    Language Message File. Helps provide a solution for systems that
    have users operating in multiple languages. The tool allows
    application access to a standard function to determine what
    message file to override to.

LOCKMSG

    Locked Record Message. Describes a standard method of producing a
    separate display when a locked record condition occurs. Allows a
    program to send to the interactive user or to the system operator
    a message describing the locked record condition and who has the
    lock. Reply options include 1) Try again, 2) Send a message to the
    user who has the lock, or 3) Send a message to the system
    operator, and 4) Cancel (optional).

LOCKWAIT

    The Lock Wait tool provides commands to check for jobs in a LCKW
    status as seen with WRKACTJOB. RUNLCKWAIT provides job log
    messages if jobs are waiting for a lock. SBMLCKWAIT submits a
    never ending batch job that sends messages to a message queue if
    jobs are locked. The LCKW value can be caused by either a job
    waiting for a record lock or an object lock.

LOGCL

    Log CL Statements. Provides a simple key stroke savings for
    invoking CHGJOB LOGCLPGM(*YES). Requesting logging allows a form
    of debugging of CL programs without going to debug mode.

LOOKUP

    The Lookup command provides a search within a CL program of a
    character variable that is an array of equal length elements. The
    variable must be declared as *CHAR LEN(32000). An alternate array
    may be specified and the corresponding element returned after a
    successful lookup. The alternate array variable must also be
    declared as *CHAR LEN(32000).

LOOKUP2

    The Lookup 2 command provides a search within a CL program of a
    character variable of 32,000 bytes that is an array of equal
    length elements. An option allows the insertion into the first
    blank element. Another option allows a shorter length for the
    lookup argument to enable additional information to be stored in
    each element.

LOOKUP3

    The Lookup 3 command provides a simple lookup capability to check
    whether an argument exists in an array. The array can be a large
    CL variable of up to 5,000 bytes. A generic search argument is
    supported.

LUVSEU

    The Love SEU command blanks out the text of the EDT0630 message of
    QEDTMSG in QPDA that is used to describe the 'modern alternative
    to SEU'. If you love SEU, you can blank out the message and
    prevent having to see the words over and over again. The message
    ID changed is EDT0630.

MAILADR

    The Mail Address tool is a series of commands that allow you to
    create and maintain a list of E-Mail addresses. The MAILADR tool
    is required to use the SNDxxxMAIL commands unless a specific
    E-Mail address is entered. MAILADR allows an optional logging of
    anything sent by the SNDxxxMAIL commands.

MODUSE

    The Module Use tool allows you to capture information about the
    modules in ILE programs or service programs. A subfile display
    provides a 'where used' capability of what programs contain the
    same module. A second subfile display provides a simple review of
    modules by program. You must first convert the information from
    ILE *PGM and *SRVPGM objects.

MONMSGQ

    The Monitor Message Queue tool provides a simple solution for
    monitoring a message queue for specific message IDs so that an
    action may be performed. For example, you may want to call a
    program when a specific message arrives on a message queue such as
    QSYSMSG. To use MONMSGQ, see the 'Getting started' instructions.

MOVALLOBJ

    The Move All Objects command moves one or more objects from one
    library to another. An option allows a determination of what
    processing should occur if the object already exists in the To
    library. The default moves only objects that do not exist in the
    To library.

MOVCHRDEC

    Move Character to Decimal. Rarely required, but allows a packed
    data value defined as character in CL to be moved (not converted)
    to a decimal field. Useful when packed data appears in a character
    field and must be changed to decimal.

MOVCLPDCL

    The Move CLP DCLs command moves DCL and DCLF statements from
    anywhere in CL or CLLE source to the correct place in the source.
    This allows you to enter a DCL statement when you are coding and
    then use MOVCLPDCL before compiling the program.

MOVCRTDAT

    The Move by Create Date command moves objects from one library to
    another based on a range of object creation dates specified.
    Because ACTION(*CHECK) is the default, no objects are moved and a
    listing describes those that would be moved. If ACTION(*MOVE) is
    specified, the objects are moved.

MOVDECCHR

    The Move Decimal to Character command moves a *DEC value (packed
    data) to a *CHAR LEN(8) variable and retains the packed
    representation. The data is right adjusted in the return variable.
    This allows the data to be passed to other functions which require
    a packed representation.

MOVJOB

    The Move Job command moves one, generic, or all jobs from one job
    queue to another. Selection may be made on a specific or generic
    job or user name. MOVJOB simplifies moving jobs.

MOVLIBOBJ

    Move Library Objects. Move some or all objects in a library to a
    different library. Options for specific object type, generic names
    or all objects beginning with other than Q. Useful for mass moves.

MOVM

    Move Member. Move a member from one file to another. Helpful for
    handling source when members must be moved from one source file to
    another. It uses CPYSRCF and then removes the member from the
    FROMFILE.

MOVMNYOBJ

    Move Many Objects. Allows a list of objects of differing types to
    be moved. Each object is moved using MOVOBJ. Useful for mass
    moving of objects.

MOVMSGD

    The Move Message Description command moves one, a range, or all
    message descriptions from one message file to another. Any message
    IDs that are moved are removed from the From message file. A
    listing is displayed or output of all messages moved and any
    errors that have occurred.

MOVOLDOBJ

    The Move Old Objects command moves objects to a specific library
    that have not been used since a specified date. A list of
    libraries (including generic) may be specified. This allows for
    cleanup functions to occur.

MOVSPLF

    Move Spooled File. Moves one or all spooled files from one output
    queue to another. Options are provided to move only those spooled
    files meeting a certain status (e.g. RDY) a specific USER or
    specific USRDTA. Useful for automating the movement of spooled
    files from one queue to another.

MOVSPLOUTQ

    The Move Spooled File Output Queue command is a special purpose
    function intended for the case when CVTOUTQ cannot be used because
    the number of spooled files exceeds the 16MB limit of a user space
    (approximately 160,000 spooled files). MOVSPLOUTQ reads the
    WRKOUTQ spooled file and moves a specified number of spooled
    files.

MOVTODEC

    Move To Decimal. Performs an RPG MOVE like operation where no
    decimal alignment is performed. Useful for avoiding the rules of
    CHGVAR which forces decimal alignment. The companion command
    MOVTOCHR allows a move from a decimal field which has decimal
    positions to a character field without the result containing a
    decimal point.

MRGDIRE

    The Merge Directory Entry tool allows the user to merge a single
    or all directory entries using a user generated file as input. The
    file would typically be created by the CVTDIRE command which is
    part of the same tool. The intent of the tool is to allow you to
    copy directory entries from one system to another.

MRGOBJ

    The Merge Objects command is intended for the case where you batch
    the changes that are to go into production. The command handles
    the merging in of normal objects, data base networks, and source
    members. Either new or replacement objects/members are handled. An
    option exists to retain or replace the production data. The
    command can be used on the same system or a remote system.

MRGSPLF

    The Merge Spooled Files command combines all spooled files from an
    output queue into a single spooled file. This essentially makes a
    book out of multiple chapters. You are responsible for using the
    same spooled file attributes (such as LPI) for all spooled files
    being combined. Only standard DP output is provided for (no
    special graphics).

MRGUSRPRF

    The Merge User Profile command allows for the case where you want
    to transfer ownership, authorizations, etc of one user to another
    user profile. Owned objects, authorizations, spooled files, names
    within Job Descriptions, and names within Job Schedule entries are
    changed. If successful, the From user profile is deleted. The name
    within user data or TAA objects is not changed.

MSGCTL

    Message Control. Allows automation of a message queue. Provides a
    method of programming a message queue (e.g. QSYSOPR). Aimed at
    environments that want to 1) Run unattended, 2) Run mostly
    unattended, or 3) Reduce the number of messages that an operator
    must deal with in QSYSOPR (show only important messages). Uses a
    data base file to describe the actions. Allows forwarding of
    specific messages including the proper handling of inquiry types.

MTNALLJRN

    The Maintain All Journals command provides a simple means of
    creating and deleting journal receivers for all journals on the
    system. The command is intended to be run just prior to a backup.
    This allows for a full save of the recently detached journal
    receivers and deletes any old journal receivers that are already
    saved. A listing is provided of all journals and journal receivers
    with any action taken.

MTNJRN

    Maintain Journal. Provides a simple solution for changing journal
    receivers. Allows a special value for the system supplied journals
    to be handled.

MTNJRN2

    The Maintain Journal 2 command provides the ability to delete old
    receivers (and add a new receiver) to one or more journals. Both
    system and user journals may be specified.

MYQ

    The MY Q tool is a series of commands that lets you send and
    receive entries to a simple queue. This allows one program to
    place the entries on the queue and a second (or the same) program
    to receive them in a loop or by an entry number. The queue is
    a *USRSPC object that can contain up to 8,000 entries. All
    commands default the name of the queue to MYQ in QTEMP. A specific
    queue and library may be named.

NAMADR

    The Name and Address tool is designed to allow you to key in names
    and addresses (such as from business cards) and then find a name
    by using a simple search technique. Each user can have his own
    unique data base or a data base can be shared by multiple users.

NBRCTR

    The Number Counter tool provides the best performing solution for
    the case where a consecutive number must be assigned for multiple
    jobs. For example, the NBRCTR tool should be considered if
    multiple operators are entering orders and each order should be
    assigned the next consecutive number.

NOOP

    The No Op command does not perform any operation. Its function is
    to allow a command to be specified when one is required for a
    specification, but no run time function is needed. A completion
    message is sent if the command is run.

NTEFIL

    Note file. A program that allows you to add notes (text comments)
    to an application. Each unique key can have an optional master
    note and up to 9 notes per day. Each note is a display of 14 lines
    with 75 bytes per line. A demonstration command exists to assist
    you in understanding the tool.

OBJTYP

    The Object Type tool provides four source members for use with the
    CPYCMD tool. Only source is provided. The source is intended for
    command definition involving a typical object type parameter. No
    command object or program exists.

OPNSPLF

    The Open Spooled File command is a testing aid. It allows a
    spooled file to be opened with a specific name and remain open.
    The intent of OPNSPLF is to allow other functions to test how they
    operate on an opened spooled file.

OR

    Logical OR. Or's two fields together. Useful for scrambling data.
    Used by the SCRAMBLE function.

OUTFFLD

    The Outfile Fields tool is a series of commands that allow you to
    display a field name that exists in either a system and/or TAA
    model file. This can assist in understanding the attributes of the
    field and the command which outputs the file. After the required
    files are created and the field information is converted, the
    DSPOUTFFLD command can be used.

PAGSEP

    The Page Separator program allows you to have large block letters
    for spooled job or file page separators. Up to 3 values of 10
    characters each may be written as large block letters. Each block
    letter is 10 x 10 in space with the character taking up 8 x 10.
    Options exist to tailor the values that print as block letters
    such as job, user name, originating system, user data, etc.

PARSE

    The Parse command allows the parsing of an input value into one or
    more return variables. A list of separator characters must be
    specified (default is 'blank') to determine how the input value
    should be parsed. Up to 30 return variables of a maximum length of
    200 bytes may be returned. PARSE is not intended to parse an i5/OS
    command string.





















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































					

Added to TAA Productivity tools April 1, 1995


Home Page Up to Top